You are on page 1of 556

Installation and Commissioning Manual

Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16638-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept



ABB Automation Technology Products AB


Robotics
S-721 68 VSTERS
SWEDEN
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000
Telefax:
+46 (0) 21 132592

Installation and Commissioning Manual


IRB 940 Tricept
3HAC 16638-1
-

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and


should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages
arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without
ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to
a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention
will be prosecuted.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then
current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved.


ABB Automation Technology Products AB
Robotics
SE-721 68 Vsters
Sweden

Table of Contents

Overview
Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept
Chapter 1: Safety, service
Introduction
Safety, service - General
Section A: References

Limitation of Liability
Applicable Safety Standards
Related information
Section B: Safety risks

Safety risks related to end effector


Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

Safety fence dimensions


Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulator's arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit
Work inside the manipulators working range
Chapter 2: Reference Information
Introduction
Screw joints
Weight specifications
Chapter 3: Manipulator
Introduction
Section A: Unpacking

Pre-installation procedure
Working range, IRB 940 Tricept
Risk of tipping/Stability
Section B: On-site installation

Lifting manipulator in a horizontal orientation

3HAC 16638-1

1
3
5
5
6
7

7
7
8
9

9
9
9
10
10
11
13

13
13
14
14
15
15
15
17
17
18
20
21
21
22

22
26
27
28

28

Table of Contents

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a trolley


Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a lifting jack
Manually releasing the brakes
Orienting and securing the manipulator
Fitting equipment on manipulator
Loads
Section C: Electrical connections

Installation of cabling on board the manipulator


Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling
Connectors on the distribution box
Chapter 4: Controller
Introduction
Section A: Unpacking

Transporting and unpacking, S4Cplus


Section B: On-site Installation

Lifting the controller cabinet


Required installation space, control cabinet
Bolt pattern, control cabinet
Installation of external power transformer
Installation of Distributed Drive Unit (DDU)
Section C: Electrical connections

C - 1: Signal/Power cables
Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, S4Cplus cabling
Connectors on control cabinet, S4Cplus
Connectors on distributed drive unit, DDU
Connection of mains power to control cabinet, S4Cplus
C - 2: Signal connections
Signal Classes
Selecting Cables
Interference elimination
Connection types
Connections to screw terminals
Connections to connectors
C - 3: Customer connections on controller
The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit
External customer connections on panel X1 - X4
Connection of external safety relay

ii

31
35
39
40
44
46
47

47
49
52
53
53
54

54
56

56
57
58
59
64
68

68
68
70
71
72
74
74
75
77
79
80
81
81
81
91
94

3HAC 16638-1

Table of Contents

C - 4: Supplies
External 24V supply
24V I/O supply
115/230 VAC supply
C - 5: Buses
Connection of the CAN bus
Interbus-S, slave DSQC 351
Profibus-DP, slave DSQC 352
C - 6: I/O units
Distributed I/O units
Distributed I/O, digital sensors
Distributed I/O, digital I/O DSQC 328 (option)
AD Combi I/O, DSQC 327 (optional)
Analog I/O, DSQC 355 (optional)
Encoder interface unit, DSQC 354 (optional)
Relay I/O, DSQC 332 (optional)
Digital I/O (120 VAC), DSQC 320 (optional)
C - 7: Communication
Communication concept, Allen-Bradley
RIO, remote I/O for Allen-Bradley PLC DSQC 350
Communication, serial links
Communication, Ethernet
External operators panel
Section D: Start-up

Inspection before start-up


Start-up
Section E: Installation of controller software

Loading system software


RobotWare CD-ROM
Installing new Robot Controller Software with RobInstall
Create a new Robot Controller System
Update the Robot Controller image
Transfer Robot Controller System using Ethernet connection
Transfer Robot Controller System using floppy disks
RobInstall preferences
Section F: Robot controller

BootImage
Start window
Reboot Window
Boot Disk Window

3HAC 16638-1

96
96
98
99
99
99
104
110
114
114
115
116
120
124
130
136
140
144
144
146
149
154
157
159

159
160
162

162
164
166
168
173
175
180
182
184

184
185
187
188

iii

Table of Contents

Network Settings Window


LAN Settings Window
Service Settings Window
System selection window
How to perform a Restart
How to Start in Query Mode

189
190
192
193
194
198

Section G: System directory structure

200

Media pool in the PC


System pool in the PC
File structure in the robot controller mass storage memory
Preparation of S4Cplus software to be installed
Handling mass memory storage capacity
Chapter 5: Calibration
When to calibrate
Section A: General

How to calibrate the robot system


Calibration tool kit, contents
Section B: Preliminaries

Correct orientation of axes


Checking the calibration position
Updating the revolution counter
Fine calibration procedure on TPU
Section C: Calibration

Directions for all axes


Fine calibration, all axes
Section D: After calibration

Post calibration procedure

iv

200
201
202
203
204
207
207
208

208
210
211

211
215
216
219
222

222
224
231

231

3HAC 16638-1

Overview

About This
Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for installing the


complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during installation, from lifting the manipulator to its
work site through installing application software in the robot controller, making
the robot ready for operation.

Who Should Read


This Manual?

This manual is intended for:

Prerequisites

The reader should...

Organization of
Chapters

installation personnel on the installation site.

have the required knowledge of mechanical as well as electrical installation work.

The manual is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter

3HAC 16638-1

Contents

1.

Safety, service

2.

Reference Information

3.

Manipulator

4.

Controller

5.

Calibration

References
Reference

Document Id

Circuit diagram, Manipulator

Included in 3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual,


part 2

Circuit diagram, Controller

Included in 3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual,


part 2

Revisions

Revision

Description

First edition

3HAC 16638-1

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists


of several manuals listed below:

Overview,
Installation and
Commissioning
Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:

Overview, Repair
Manual

Overview,
Maintenance
Manual

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Unpacking

On-site Installation

Electrical connections

Start-up

Robot controller

Installation of controller software

System directory structure

Calibration

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare


parts

Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered


spare parts

Circuit Diagram for manipulator

Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Maintenance schedules

Maintenance activities

Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter Safety, service is divided into the following sections:


A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability
applicable safety standards
referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system.
The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector
Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid


dangers.
Safety fence dimensions
Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulators arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device
Work inside the manipulators working range

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and
responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete
system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety
of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed
and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards
and regulations of the country where the robot is installed.
The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable
safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the
safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have
been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be
familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the
applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of
external safety
devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external
safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This
means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral
equipment as well as from the robot.
In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service
References

Section A: References
Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be
construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause
injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

3HAC 16638-1

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:

EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology

EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop

EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment

EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces

EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles

EN 775, Robot safety

EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines

EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment


(EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure)
(EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains)

EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments


(EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test)
(EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields)
(EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
immunity test)

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents

Type of information

Detailed in document

Installation of safety devices

Installation and Commissioning Manual

Changing robot modes

Users Guide

Section

Start-up

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks


Safety risks related to end effector
Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure
that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating.
It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the


event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Residual energy

Safe design

3HAC 16638-1

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken.

The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before


starting to repair them.

Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop.

Dump valves should be used in case of emergency.

Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

Qualified
personnel

Extraordinary
risks

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different
industrial applications.

All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the
applicable safety regulations.

Care must be taken at all times.

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are
familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated
with its different parts.

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other
than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be
rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation


and service

Nation/region
specific regulations

10

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning


must always be followed.

Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so


that the robot can be stopped quickly.

Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are
available for the installation in question.

Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot
system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the
robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage
related risks

To be observed
by the supplier of
the complete system

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up


in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are
suitable devices.

Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the
robot's working space.

The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released
or when the motors or other components are removed.

When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling


objects.

Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller.

Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or
other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because
of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the
robot.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related
risks, general

3HAC 16638-1

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while


the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the
mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads
and disconnecting or connecting units.

The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can
be turned off outside the robots working space.

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related
risks, controller,
S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:

Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller.

Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power
from an external source.

The mains supply/mains switch

The power unit

The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC)

The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!)

The drive unit (700 VDC)

The service outlets (115/230 VAC)

The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the
machining process

The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even
when the robot is disconnected from the mains.

Additional connections

Voltage related
risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:

Voltage related
risks, tools, material handling
devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in
the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working
process may be damaged.

12

The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC)

The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC)

The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V
AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions


Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the
fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:

- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy
associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and
ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any
projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made of suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces
involved and appropriate materials.

- insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically


the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process
down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values.
Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation.

- isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray
mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes
involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot
(manipulator or controller)!

3HAC 16638-1

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the
brakes" in the Installation Manual.
The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been
released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not
increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may
be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed
below:
1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of
the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load).
2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating
mode selector on the controller.
3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then
the brake function is adequate.

14

3HAC 16638-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach
Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit
(TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When
the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the
MOTORS OFF state.
To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented:
The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way.
During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as
there is no need for the robot to move.
The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when
entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control
over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points
must be observed:
The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position
to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link
or remote control panel.
The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector
is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the
working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.
Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices
mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

3HAC 16638-1

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

16

3HAC 16638-1

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

3HAC 16638-1

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic
materials and do not apply to soft or brittle materials.
Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure
description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are
only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

Screws with
slotted or cross
recess head

Screws with
hexagon socket
head

18

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the
tables below:

Dimension

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"

M2.5

0.25

M3

0.5

M4

1.2

M5

2.5

M6

5.0

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M5

M6

10

17

M8

24

28

40

M10

47

55

70

M12

82

95

120

3HAC 16638-1

Reference Information

3HAC 16638-1

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M16

200

235

300

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are
sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in
this way.
ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using
lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

20

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator

Chapter 3:Manipulator
Introduction

Definitions

3HAC 16638-1

This chapter contains necessary information for installing the manipulator to the
working site.

21

Manipulator
Unpacking

Section A: Unpacking
Pre-installation procedure

General

This instruction is primarily intended for use when unpacking and installing the
manipulator (mechanical robot) for the first time. It also contains information useful during later re-installation of the manipulator.

Checking the prerequisites for


installation

The checklist below details what must be observed before proceeding with the
actual installation of the manipulator:
1. Make sure only qualified installation personnel, conforming to all
national and local codes, are allowed to perform the installation.
2. Make sure the manipulator has not been damaged, by visually inspecting the manipulator and control cabinet exterior.
3. Make sure the lifting device to be used is dimensioned to handle the
weight of the manipulator as stated in Weight, manipulator.
4. If the manipulator is not to be installed directly, it must be stored as in
Storage conditions, manipulator.
5. Make sure the appointed operating environment of the manipulator
conforms to the specifications as in Operating conditions, manipulator.
6. Before taking the manipulator to its installation site, make sure the site
conforms to Loads on flange, manipulator and Protection classes.
7. Before moving the manipulator, please observe Risk of tipping/Stability
regarding risk of tipping!
8. When these prerequisites have been met, the manipulator may be
taken to its installation site as in Lifting manipulator in a horizontal/vertical orientation.

22

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Unpacking

Weight,
manipulator

3HAC 16638-1

The table below shows the weight of the manipulator:

Manipulator model

Weight

IRB 940 Tricept

570 kg

Distribution box

31 kg

23

Manipulator
Unpacking

Loads on flange,
manipulator

The table below shows the maximum forces and torques working on the manipulator during operation.
NOTE! These forces and torques are extreme values that are rarely encountered
during operation. The values also never reach their maximum simultaneously!

Tz

xx0200000362

24

Force

Maximum stress transmitted to the mounting base

Force xy

51 kN

Force z

68 kN

Torque xy

14 kNm

Torque z

45 kNm

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Unpacking

Storage
conditions,
manipulator

Operating
conditions,
manipulator

The table below shows the allowed storage conditions for the manipulator and the
distribution box:

Parameter

Value

Min. ambient temperature, storage

-25C

Max. ambient temperature, storage

+55C

Max. ambient temperature, storage (less than 24 hrs)

+55C

Max. ambient humidity, storage

Max. 95% at constant


temperature

The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the manipulator and
the distribution box:

Parameter

Value

Min. ambient temperature, operation

+5C

Max. ambient temperature, operation, manipulator

+45C

Max. ambient humidity, operation

Max. 95% at constant


temperature

Note! The robot must not be operated until the internal temperature of the robot is
stabilized within the prescribed operational temperature range!

Protection
classes

3HAC 16638-1

The table below shows the protection class of the main parts of the robot system:

Equipment

Protection class

Manipulator

IP 66

Distribution box

IP 67

Overpressure unit

IP 67

25

Manipulator
Unpacking

Working range, IRB 940 Tricept

Illustration

The illustration below shows the unrestricted working range of IRB 940 Tricept:

400

0
400

800

800
1200

800

400

400

800

1200

1200

800

400

400

800

1200
(mm)

(mm)

xx0200000356

26

Absolute Tolerance Area at the tool-coordinate system, TCP0

Working range, centre of axis 5

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Unpacking

Risk of tipping/Stability

General

The section below details how to make sure the manipulator does not tip over
before it has not been safely secured to the foundation.

Stability

The figure below shows the robot in its shipping position which also is the most
stable.
The robot must be placed on a spacer, at least 100mm in height, in order to avoid
the risk of collision with the axis 2 servomotor.

B
xx0200000357

26 mm (most stable position of axes 1, 2 and 3)

Spacer, min. 100 mm in height

The table below specifies the most stable position of each axis of the manipulator.
Axis

Position

Note

1, 2, 3

26 mm

Shown in figure above!

4, 6

-90

1. DO NOT change the manipulator position before securing it to its foundation. The shipping position is the most stable.

3HAC 16638-1

27

Manipulator
On-site installation

Section B: On-site installation


Lifting manipulator in a horizontal orientation

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator in a horizontal orientation
from a transportation pallet to a stand.

Required equipment

Lifting in horizontal orientation

Equipment

Note

Crane or hoist

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

1 strap, length 2 m

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 straps, length 1 m

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 upper platform eyebolts

M16

2 shackles

The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the


upper platform.

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, horizontally, using the lifting equipment specified above.
The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended


load!

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly
and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

28

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action

Note

1.

Run the overhead crane


to a position above the
manipulator.

2.

Fit the 2 metre strap


around the wrist unit, as
shown in the adjacent figure.

xx0200000317

3.

Hook the strap to the lift,


or crane, as shown in the
adjacent figure.

4.

Unless already in posiDimension specified above!


tion, fit the eyebolts to the
upper platform.

xx0200000318

3HAC 16638-1

29

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
5.

Note

Attach the 1 metre straps


to the eyebolts using the
shackles.

C
xx0200000319

30

6.

Attach the straps to the


lift, or crane, as shown in
figure above!

7.

Lift the manipulator to the


required location and disconnect the lifting equipment.

A: Strap, 1 m (2 pcs)

B: Shackle (2 pcs)

C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a trolley

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator from a transportation pallet
to a stand, after turning it into a vertical orientation.
Notice that there are two different ways of turning the manipulator into a vertical
orientation. The section below details a method using a trolley or a machine skate,
that is used to wheel the front of the manipulator towards the centre of the lift as
the manipulator is hoisted.

Required equipment

Lifting in vertical
orientation, using
a trolley

Equipment

Note

Crane or hoist

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 straps, length 2 m

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 upper platform eyebolts

M16

2 shackles

The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the


upper platform.

Trolley (or machine skate)

Capacity: 500 kg.


Height: 400 mm.

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, vertically, using the lifting equipment specified above.

The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended


load!

3HAC 16638-1

31

Manipulator
On-site installation

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly
and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

- Ensure that the area around the manipulator is clear as the machine can swing
round as it leaves the pallet!
- Ensure that the trolley has free movement while lifting. If the trolley gets stuck, the
manipulator is likely to fall off and can cause personal injury and damage to the
manipulator!

Step Action

Note

1.

Unless already in position, fit the eyebolts to


the upper platform.

2.

Attach the 2 metre


straps to the eyebolts
using the shackles.

Dimension specified above!

C
xx0200000320

3.

32

A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs)

B: Shackle (2 pcs)

C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

Attach the straps to the


lift, or crane, as shown
in figure above!

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
4.

Note

Place the trolley under


the wrist unit and guide
it into the correct position as the manipulator
is lifted, as shown in the
adjacent figure.

A
B

C
E

xx0200000321

5.

3HAC 16638-1

When the wrist is resting squarely on the trolley it is safe to continue


lifting it off the pallet, as
shown in the adjacent
figure.
Note! Exercise extreme
care when lowering the
wrist unit on to the trolley. Dropping the
manipulator onto the
trolley can cause damage to the manipulator
and/or affect the calibration of the tripod.

A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs)

B: Wrist unit

C: Trolley

D: 125 mm

E: 400 mm

xx0200000322

33

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action

Note

6.

As the manipulator is
lifted off the pallet, carefully remove the pallet
to allow free movement
of the trolley towards
the centre of the lift, as
shown in the adjacent
figure.

7.

Continue lifting the


manipulator until it
leaves the trolley and is
hanging vertically, as
shown in the adjacent
figure.

8.

Lift the manipulator and


move it to the required
location.

xx0200000323

xx0200000324

34

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a lifting jack

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator from a transportation pallet
to a stand, after turning it into a vertical orientation.
Notice that there are two different ways of turning the manipulator into a vertical
orientation. The section below details a method using a lifting jack.

Required equipment

Lifting in vertical
orientation, using
a lifting jack

Equipment

Note

Crane or hoist

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 straps, length 2 m

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

1 strap, length 1 m

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

2 upper platform eyebolts

M16

2 shackles

The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the


upper platform.

Lifting jack

Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, vertically, using the lifting equipment specified above.

The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended


load!

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly
and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

3HAC 16638-1

35

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action

Note

1.

Unless already in posi- Dimension specified above!


tion, fit the eyebolts to
the upper platform.

2.

Attach the 2 metre


straps to the eyebolts
using the shackles.

C
xx0200000320

3.

36

A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs)

B: Shackle (2 pcs)

C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

Attach the straps to the


lift, or crane, as shown
in figure above.

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
4.

Note

Attach the 1 metre strap


to the wrist as shown in
the adjacent figure.

xx0200000317

5.

Connect one end of the Dimension specified above!


lifting jack to the strap
around the wrist and
B
the other to the lift, or
crane. Adjust the length
so that the lifting jack is
tightened, as shown in
the adjacent figure.
A

xx0200000325

6.

3HAC 16638-1

A: Strap around wrist unit

B: Crane

Lift the whole manipulator using the lift, or


crane, away from the
pallet and remove the
pallet.

37

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
7.

Note

Lower the wrist end of


the manipulator using
the lifting jack.
When the wrist gets
near the floor, raise the
whole manipulator further, as shown in the
adjacent figure.
Repeat until the manipulator hangs vertically.

xx0200000326

8.

38

Remove the lifting jack


and lift the manipulator
to the required location.

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Manually releasing the brakes

General

The section below details how to release the holding brakes of each axis motor.
This may be done by:

using push-buttons on the distribution box (internal brake release unit).


This requires either that the controller is connected to the power supply or
that the R1.MP connector (at the distribution box) is supplied with +24 V on
R1.MP.B16 and 0 V on B14 or B15.

Supplying power on the wrong pin may cause all brakes on the manipulator to be
released!

Internal brake
release unit

This section details how to release the holding brakes using the internal brake
release unit.
When releasing the holding brakes, the manipulator axes may move very quickly
and sometimes in unexpected ways! Make sure no personnel is near the manipulator arm!

Step Action

3HAC 16638-1

Info/Illustration

1.

The push-button unit is equipped with six but- The push-button unit is
tons for controlling the axis brakes. The but- located on the outside of
tons are numbered with the axes numbers.
the distribution box.

2.

Release the holding brake on a particular


manipulator axis by pressing the appropriate
button on the internal brake release panel.
The brake will function again as soon as the
button is released.

39

Manipulator
On-site installation

Orienting and securing the manipulator

General

This section details how to orient and secure the manipulator at the stand in order
to run the robot safely.
The cable harness should be installed in the stand before the manipulator is
mounted to it. Installation of the cabling is described in chapter "Electrical connections".

Attachment
screws

The table below specifies the type of securing screws and washers to be used for
securing the manipulator to the foundation. Securing screws are included in the
delivery of the manipulator.

Suitable screws, lightly lubricated

MC6S, M16 x 55

Quality

Quality 8.8

Suitable washer

Thickness: 4 mm

Tightening torque

200 Nm

A locating pin may be used in the mounting flange, when necessary. The dimension for the attachment hole is detailed in part "Hole configuration, mounting
flange".

40

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Illustration,
securing manipulator at stand

The figure below shows how to mount the manipulator to a stand. The figure
shows prepared cabling in the stand.

xx0200000348

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator attachment bolts

Centering ring

Mounting flange

41

Manipulator
On-site installation

Securing the
manipulator

This section details how to secure the manipulator to the stand in a vertical position, after fitting the stand to the foundation.

Step

42

Action

Info/Illustration

1.

Lift and turn the manipulator to vertical orien- Detailed in "Lifting the
tation.
manipulator in a vertical
orientation, using a trolley/lifting jack".

2.

Move the manipulator to the vicinity of its


installation location.

3.

Pull the cabling through the stand and


through the centering ring. Fit the ring to the
stand.

Shown in figure above!

4.

Guide the manipulator gently while lowering it


into its mounting position.
Make sure the manipulator mounting flange is
correctly fitted onto the centering ring!
If necessary, use a locating pin in the flange.

Shown in figure above!


Location of the attachment hole for the pin is
shown in part "Hole configuration, mounting
flange".

5.

Fit the 8 bolts and washers in the mounting


flange attachment holes.

Specified in "Attachment
screws".
Shown in figure above!
Note! Lightly lubricate the
bolts before assembly!

6.

Tighten the bolts in a criss-cross pattern to


ensure that the flange is not distorted.

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Hole configuration, mounting


flange

The illustration below shows the hole configuration used when securing the
manipulator. Note that the holes are not equally spaced on the flange.

A-A
(400)
350
53
86.5

C-C

18 Through
8x)

3
10 H8 Through

87.5
xx0200000358

3HAC 16638-1

43

Manipulator
On-site installation

Fitting equipment on manipulator

General

The manipulator features mounting holes for additional equipment.

Illustration, fitting
of extra equipment on upper
platform

The illustration below shows the mounting holes available for fitting extra equipment on the upper platform.

309.5

x M8x12 Deep

xx0200000360

44

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
On-site installation

Illustration, fitting
on mounting
flange

The illustration below shows the mounting holes available for fitting equipment
on the mounting flange.

xx0200000359

Fastener quality

When fitting tools on the mounting flange (see the figure above), use only screws
with quality 12.9. When fitting other equipment, standard screws with quality 8.8
can be used.
A guiding pin may be used when fitting equipment on to the tool flange. Attach
the pin to the extra equipment using a press fit, in order to make sure that the pin
remains in the equipment when removing it from the flange.

3HAC 16638-1

45

Manipulator
On-site installation

Loads

General

Any loads mounted on the manipulator must be defined correctly and carefully
(with regard to the position of centre of gravity and inertia factor) in order to avoid
jolting movements and overloading the motors. If this is not done correctly operational stops may result.

References

Load diagrams, permitted extra loads (equipment) and their positions are specified in the Product Specification. The loads must also be defined in the software
as detailed in the Users Guide.

Brake performance

Manipulator motor brake performance depends on any loads attached. For further
information about brake performance, please contact ABB Robotics.

46

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Section C: Electrical connections


Installation of cabling on board the manipulator

General

The manipulator is connected to the control cabinet via a distribution box, after
mounting it on the stand.
The section below describes how to install the cabling on board the manipulator.
All the necessary cabling is included in the delivery of the robot but must be connected both to the manipulator and to the distribution box.
All cabling is specified in the part "Connecting the manipulator to the control
cabinet, manipulator (/controller) cabling"
The figure below shows how the cabling is installed to the manipulator.

xx0200000349

3HAC 16638-1

Cabling in one of the two grooves in the upper platform

47

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Installation of
cabling on board
the manipulator

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Attach the cables, axes 1-2-3,


with straps in the cable grooves
on the upper platform, as shown
in the figure above.
The cabling is marked with a red
ring at the correct attachment
point. The ring is then located
behind the straps.
When installing the cabling in the
robot it is very important to adjust
its looseness correctly.

2.

Connect the cables, axes 1-2-3, Connection points detailed in "Conto the motors of axes 1-2-3. Fit the necting the manipulator to the concables to the brackets mounted
trol cabinet, manipulator cabling".
nearby the motors and secure
with straps.

3.

Fit the cables, axis 4-5-6, inside


the cable chain.

4.

Connect the cables on top of the


housing, at the upper end of the
center unit.

5.

Fasten the cable chain with


attachment screws in the cable
bracket at axis 2 and at top of the
housing.

Connection points detailed in "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling".

4x

4x

xx0200000428

48

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling

General

The manipulator is to be connected to the control cabinet via a distribution box,


after mounted to the stand. This section specifies the cabling to be used and their
connection points.
How to install the manipulator cables on board the manipulator is detailed in the
part "Installation of cabling on board the manipulator".

Main cable categories


Cable category

Description

Manipulator cables

The cables between the distribution box and the manipulator motors are specially manufactured with extra
strong screening. The cabling for each motor consists
of two separate cables, one power cable and one signal
cable. The cabling contains conductors for:
The power cable contains conductors for:
Motor phases

Earth connection

Motor brake

Motor temperature sensors

The signal cable contains conductors for:


Resolvers
Distribution box cables

3HAC 16638-1

Handles power supply to and control of the manipulator's motors as well as feedback from the serial measurement board.

49

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Manipulator
cables

The manipulator cables are included in the standard delivery. They are completely
pre-manufactured and ready to plug in.
The cabling transfers drive power and resolver data for drive and control of the six
axes.

Distribution box
cables

Cable sub-category

Connection point, Connection point,


distribution box
manipulator

Manipulator cable, power, axis 1

XM1

XM1.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 1

XR1

XR1.1

Manipulator cable, power, axis 2

XM2

XM2.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 2

XR2

XR2.1

Manipulator cable, power, axis 3

XM3

XM3.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 3

XR3

XR3.1

Manipulator cable, power, axis 4

XM4

XM4.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 4

XR4

XR4.1

Manipulator cable, power, axis 5

XM5

XM5.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 5

XR5

XR5.1

Manipulator cable, power, axis 6

XM6

XM6.1

Manipulator cable, signal, axis 6

XR6

XR6.1

These cables are included in the standard delivery. They are completely pre-manufactured and ready to plug in.

Cable subcategory
Distribution box
cable, power

50

Description
Transfers drive
power from the
drive units in the
control cabinet to
the manipulators
distribution box.

Connection
Connection point,
point, cabinet distribution box
XS1

R1.MP

3HAC 16638-1

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Cable subcategory
Distribution box
cable, signals

Description

Connection
Connection point,
point, cabinet distribution box

Transfers resolver XS2


data from the serial
measurement
board and power
supply to the SMB
in the distribution
box.

R1.SMB

Distribution box
cable, power
Cable

Article number

Distribution box cable, power, 7 m

3HAC 11818-1

Distribution box cable, power, 15 m

3HAC 11818-2

Distribution box cable, power, 30 m

3HAC 11818-4

Cable

Article number

Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 7 m

3HAC 7998-1

Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 15 m

3HAC 7998-2

Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 30 m

3HAC 7998-4

Distribution box
cable, signals

3HAC 16638-1

51

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Connectors on the distribution box

General

Section "Connecting the distribution box to the control cabinet" specifies which
cables to use in order to connect the manipulators distribution box to the controller.

Connectors on
the distribution
box

All distribution box connectors are shown in the figure below.

R1.SMB

R1.MP

XM4
XM1
XM5
XM2
XM6
XM3
XR1
XR2
XR3

XR4
XR5
XR6

xx0200000430

The connectors on the controller cabinet are located as detailed in part "Connectors on the controller cabinet, S4CPlus".

52

3HAC 16638-1

Controller

Chapter 4:Controller
Introduction

Definitions

3HAC 16638-1

This chapter contains necessary information for installing the controller to the
working site.

53

Controller
Unpacking

Section A: Unpacking
Transporting and unpacking, S4Cplus

General

Before starting to unpack and install the robot system, read the safety regulations
and other instructions very carefully. These are found in separate sections in the
Users Guide and Product manual.
The installation must be done by qualified installation personnel and should conform to all national and local codes.
When you have unpacked the cabinet, check that it has not been damaged during
transport or while unpacking.

Weight,
controller cabinet

Storage
conditions,
controller cabinet

The table below shows the weights for the controller cabinet:

Controller

Weight

S4Cplus controller cabinet

240 kg

Distributed Drive Unit (option)

30 kg

The table below shows the allowed storage conditions for the controller:

Parameter

Value

Min. ambient temperature

-25C

Max. ambient temperature

+55C

Max. ambient temperature (less than 24 h) +70C


Max. ambient humidity

54

Max. 95% at constant temperature

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Unpacking

The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the controller:
Operating conditions, controller
cabinet

Protection class,
controller

3HAC 16638-1

Parameter

Value

Min. ambient temperature

+5C

Max. ambient temperature

+45C

Max. ambient humidity

Max. 95% at constant temperature

The table below shows the protection class of the controller:

Equipment

Protection class

Control cabinet

IP 54

Programming unit

IP 54

Distributed Drive Unit (option)

IP 54

55

Controller
On-site Installation

Section B: On-site Installation


Lifting the controller cabinet

Lifting device

Use the four lifting devices on the cabinet or a fork lift when lifting the controller
cabinet S4Cplus as shown below.
The figure below shows the minimum angle between the lifting straps and the
cabinet when lifting the controller.

B
xx0100000153

Cabinet delivered
without top cover

56

Min. 60when lifting with straps

Fork lift

If the controller is delivered without its top cover, a fork lift must be used. Do not
use lifting devices!

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Required installation space, control cabinet

Dimensions

The figure below shows the required installation space for the S4CPlus control
cabinet:
A

200

200

800

800

820

950
980*

500
70
620

xx0100000156

3HAC 16638-1

Air distance to wall

Cabinet extension (Option 124)

Castor wheels (Option 126)

57

Controller
On-site Installation

Bolt pattern, control cabinet

Dimensions

The figure below shows the bolt pattern for the S4CPlus control cabinet:

720

400

xx0100000157

58

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Installation of external power transformer

Location of external power transformer

The external power transformer (option) is located outside the controller as shown
in the figure below:

B
A

xx0100000154

Cable glands for input and output cables (large gland; input cable, small
gland; output cable)

Locking screws/lifting lugs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

External power transformer unit

3HAC 16638-1

Note

3HAC 11668-1

Input cables

Rec. 16 mm 2

Output cables

Rec. 6 mm 2

59

Controller
On-site Installation

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Fuse and holder

Mains voltage 200


VAC: 63 A
Mains voltage 600
VAC: 25 A

Circuit breaker

Dimensioned for
the expected currents

Standard toolkit

3HAC 15571-1

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Connections

The contents are


defined in section
"Standard toolkit"!
These procedures
include references
to the tools
required.

Circuit Diagram, controller

3HAC 5582-2

Circuit Diagram, external power transformer

3HAC 11668-11

The procedure below details how to connect the external power transformer unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

60

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Connect the shop mains power supply

Detailed in "Shop mains


power supply" below!

2.

Connect the external power transformer


input.

Detailed in "Transformer
input" below!

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Step

Shop mains
power supply

Action

Note/Illustration

3.

Connect the external power transformer out- Detailed in "Transformer


put.
output" below!

4.

Connect the controller input.

Detailed in "Controller
input" below!

The procedure below details how to connect the Shop mains power supply.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Transformer input

Action

Note/Illustration

Make sure the shop supply is fitted with suit- Fuse size specified in the
able circuit breakers and fuses.
table above!

The procedure below details how to connect the Transformer input.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Note/Illustration

Run a cable from the shop supply outlet


through the input cable inlet on the transformer unit.

Shown in the figure


above!

61

Controller
On-site Installation

Step

Transformer
output

Action

Note/Illustration

2.

Open the transformer unit by removing the


lock screws on top of the unit.

Shown in the figure


above!

3.

Connect the input cable earth conductor to


the earth terminal.

4.

Connect the three input phases to the long


Terminal: X1
terminal.
Make sure the cables are connected to the
terminals marked with the voltage value corresponding to the voltage supplied.

5.

Make sure all terminals are tightened to


ensure good electric contact.

Tightening torque:
approx. 2 Nm

The procedure below details how to connect the Transformer output.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

62

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Run a cable from the transformer unit through Shown in the figure
the output cable outlet to the robot controller. above!

2.

Connect the output cable earth conductor to


the transformer unit earth terminal.

3.

Connect the three output phases to the output terminals.


The terminals are marked with "475" for the
output voltage.

Terminals: X1.1, X1:2


and X1:3

4.

Make sure all terminals are tightened to


ensure good electric contact.

Tightening torque:
approx. 2 Nm

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Controller input

The procedure below details how to connect the Controller input.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the left cover plate


under the robot controller top
lid.

2.

Route the transformer output


cable through the gland
located on the left cabinet wall.

3.

Connect the cable inside the


robot controller (not dependent on phase sequence):
Phase 1 to L1

4.

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Phase 2 to L2

Phase 3 to L3

0 to XT26.N

Earth to the cabinet


earth connection (C in
the figure). The earth
connection is marked
with a "PE" sticker.

A
B
C
D

xx0100000155

A: Terminal X26

B: Connectors

C: Earth connection (PE)

D: Cable glands

Make sure all terminals are


Tightening torque: approx. 2 Nm
tightened to ensure good electric contact.

63

Controller
On-site Installation

Installation of Distributed Drive Unit (DDU)

Required installation space, DDU

The external DDU (option) is located outside the control cabinet. The figure
below shows the required installation space for the DDU.

300

xx0200000340

64

50 mm, required free area for the exhaust air

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Bolt pattern, DDU

The DDU is to be suspended nearby the control cabinet, using the bolt pattern
shown in the figure below.

260
xx0200000374

Connection to
earth

If the difference of potential between the control system and the DDU is too large
or there are suspicions of shorter drops in voltage, the DDU must be connected to
earth. This is done at the connection point GND (see the part "Connectors on the
DDU").

Fan cooling

The main power from the control cabinet also feeds two fans in the DDU via an
internal transformer with three input taps.
The transformer wires are connected as

3HAC 16638-1

0 - 400V for nominal mains input 400V

0 - 440V for nominal mains input 440V

0 - 480V for nominal mains input 480V

65

Controller
On-site Installation

Overheating

Changing the
connection of the
transformer

Overheating of the DDU may be caused by the following:

A line voltage lower than 480V is used, while the fans are connected as
480V. This causes a reduced fan cooling. See Changing the connection of
the transformer below.

The fuse, located at the screw terminal, has caused the fans to stop.

Insufficient airflow. See Increasing the airflow below.

Too heavy drive at too high ambient temperature. See the manual External axes.

The default connection of the transformer is the nominal mains input 480V. The
cooling is, however, reduced, when a lower line voltage is used and there may be
a risk that the drive unit is triggered at a high surrounding temperature. Therefore,
if the line voltage differs from 480V, it is recommended to switch over the default
connection to 440V or 400V instead.
To change the voltage, remove the lid of the DDU and switch the connections on
the screw terminals (see the part "Connections to screw terminals").

66

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
On-site Installation

Increasing the
airflow

If there appears to be an overheating of the DDU, without suspicion of reduced


fan cooling, the airflow may be increased by replacing the two covering plates
with vents, see figure below. This gives four openings instead of the normal two.

xx0200000373

Cabling

3HAC 16638-1

Vent

Covering plate

Section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which


cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the DDU to either the controller, the manipulator or to the external axis.

67

Controller
Electrical connections

Section C: Electrical connections


C - 1: Signal/Power cables
Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, S4Cplus cabling

General

Connect the manipulator and control cabinet to each other after securing them to
the foundation. The lists below specify which customer cables to be used.
Manipulator cabling is specified in chapter Manipulator, section Electrical
connections.

Customer cables

68

These cables are not included in the standard delivery, but are included in the
delivery of each specific option. The cables are not ready to plug in, but require
connection to terminals inside the control cabinet as well as keying. These activities are detailed in Customer Connection Kit.
Connection Connection
point,
point,
cabinet
manipulator

Cable

Art. no.

Fieldbus cable, CAN, 7 m

3HAC 13173-1

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
XS6

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, CAN, 15 m

3HAC 13173-2

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
XS6

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, CAN, 30 m

3HAC 13173-4

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
XS6

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 7 m

3HAC 13174-1

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
DP/M

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 15 m 3HAC 13174-2

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
DP/M

R1.CP/CS

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Cable

3HAC 16638-1

Art. no.

Connection Connection
point,
point,
cabinet
manipulator

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 30 m 3HAC 13174-4

XT/XP5.1
XT/XP6
DP/M

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 7 m

3HAC 14890-4

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 15 m

3HAC 14890-1

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 30 m

3HAC 14890-6

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 7 m 3HAC 15644-4

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 15


m

3HAC 15644-1

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 30


m

3HAC 15644-5

XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1


XS13

R1.CP/CS

69

Controller
Electrical connections

Connectors on control cabinet, S4Cplus

General

Section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which


cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the controller to the manipulator.

Connections to
the cabinet

All control cabinet connectors are shown in the figure below.

xx0100000247

70

For 6400S/640 and Can Bus

**

Option for 66X0 and 7600

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connectors on distributed drive unit, DDU

General

The section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which
cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the DDU (distributed drive unit) to either the controller, the manipulator or
to the external axis.

Connections to
the DDU

All DDU connectors are shown in the figure below.

S77

XS78

XP40

GND

XP49

xx0200000372

The connections on the manipulator are located on the rear of the robot base.

3HAC 16638-1

71

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of mains power to control cabinet, S4Cplus

General

Connect the power supply either inside the cabinet, or to a optional socket on the
left-hand side of the cabinet or the lower section of the front. The cable connector
is supplied but not the cable.
Dimension the mains supply cables and fuses in accordance with the rated power
and line voltage, see rating plate on the controller.

Connections to
the mains switch

Also see the Circuit Diagram.


The instruction below details how to make all the required connections to the
mains switch:

C
D
xx0100000248

XT 26

Protective Earth connection

Cable gland

Connector

Step
1.

72

Action

Info/Illustration

Remove the left cover plate under the top lid.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Step

Connection
through a power
socket

Action

Info/Illustration

2.

Pull the mains cable (outer diam. 10.2 mm)


through the gland located on the left cabinet
wall.

Shown in the figure


above!

3.

Release the connector from the knob by


pushing the release buttons located on the
side of the connector.

4.

Connect phase:
1 to L1 (Not dependent on phase
sequence)

2 to L2

3 to L3

0 to XT26.N (line neutral is needed


only for option 432)

and protective earth to the protective


earth connection.

5.

Snap the breaker on to the knob again and


check that it is fixed properly in the correct
position.

6.

Tighten the cable gland.

7.

Fasten the cover plate.

Shown in the figure


above!
NOTE! Max. conductor
size is 6 mm2 (AWG 10).
Tighten to a torque of
2.3-2.5 Nm. Retighten
after approx. 1 week.

It is possible to connect the mains supply via an industrial Harting connector (DIN
41 640). See the figure below:
Cable connectors are supplied (option 132 - 134).

A
xx0100000162

3HAC 16638-1

DIN connector

73

Controller
Electrical connections

C - 2: Signal connections
Signal Classes

Overview

Signals

74

Different rules apply to the different classes when selecting and laying cable. Signals from different classes must not be mixed.

Power Signals: Supplies external motors and brakes.

Control signals: Digital operating and data signals (digital I/O, safety
stops, etc.).

Measuring signals: Analog measuring and control signals (resolver and


analog I/O).

Data communication signals: Gateway (Field bus) connection, computer


link.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Selecting Cables

Controller cables:

All cables laid in the controller must be capable of withstanding +70C.

Power Signal:

Shielded cable with an area of at least 0.75mm 2 or AWG 18.


Note that any local standards and regulations concerning insulation and area must
always be complied with.

Control signals:

Shielded cables.

Measuring
signals:

Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors.

Data communication signals:

Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors.

A specific cable should be used for Gateway (Field bus) connections.

CAN bus with


DeviceNet for distributing I/O units:

A thin cable according to DeviceNet specification release 1.2, must be used, e.g.
ABB article no. 3HAB 8277-1. The cable is shielded and has four conductors, two
for electronic supply and two for signal transmission.
Note that a separate cable for suppling I/O loads is required.

3HAC 16638-1

75

Controller
Electrical connections

Allen-Bradley
Remote I/O:

Cables according to Allen-Bradley specification, e.g. "Blue hose", should be used


for connections between DSQC 350 and the Allen-Bradley PLC bus.

Interbus-S:

Cables according to Phoenix specification, e.g. "Green type", should be used for
connections between the DSQC 351 and external Interbus-S bus.

Profibus DP:

Cables according to Profibus DP specification should be used for connections


between the I/O unit DSQC 352 and the external Profibus DP bus.

Ethernet:

Shielded twisted pair conductors (10 Base T STP).

76

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Interference elimination

External units

External relay coils, solenoids, and other units that will be connected to the controller must be neutralized. The figure below illustrates how this can be done.
The turn-off time for DC relays increases after neutralization, especially if a diode
is connected across the coil. Varistors give shorter turn-off times. Neutralizing the
coils lengthens the life of the switches that control them.

Clamping with a
diode

The diode should be dimensioned for the same current as the relay coil, and a
voltage of twice the supply voltage.
+24V

0V

xx0100000163

Clamping with a
varistor

The varistor should be dimensioned for the same current as the relay coil, and a
voltage of twice the supply voltage.
+24V

0V

xx0100000164

3HAC 16638-1

77

Controller
Electrical connections

Clamping with an
RC circuit

R 100 ohm, 1W C 0.1 - 1 mF.


>500V max. voltage, 125V nominal voltage.
+24V DC,
or AC voltage

0V

xx0100000165

78

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection types

General

I/O, external emergency stops, safety stops, etc. can be supplied on screw connections or as industrial connectors.

Connections

3HAC 16638-1

Designation

Connection type

X(T)

Screw terminal

XP

Pin (male)

XS

Sockets (female)

79

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections to screw terminals

Overview

This section describes how to connect conductors to screw terminals. Detailed


information about connection location and functions will be found in the circuit
diagram (Service Manual).

Installation

The installation should comply with the IP54 (NEMA 12) protective standard.
1. Bend unused conductors backwards and attach them to the cable
using a clasp, or similar.
To prevent interference, ensure that unused conductors are not connected at the
other end of the cable (antenna effect).
In environments with much interference, disconnected conductors should be
grounded (0V) at both ends.

80

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections to connectors

Location of connectors

If ordered, industrial connectors can be found on the left-hand side or front of the
control cabinet (depending on the customer order). Also see the figure in section
"Connectors on control cabinet"!
The manipulator arm (not IRB 940 Tricept) is equipped with round Burndy/Framatome connectors (customer connector not included).

Connectors,
description

Each industrial connector has accommodation for four rows of 16 conductors with
a maximum conductor area of 1.5 mm 2. The pull-relief clamp must be used when
connecting the shield to the case.

Making the connection

The section below details how to crimp cable connections to pins:


1. Using a special crimp tool, crimp a pin or socket on to each non-insulated conductor.
When two conductors are be connected to the same pin or socket, both of them
must be crimped into the same pin or socket. A maximum of two conductors
may be crimped into the same pin or socket.

2. Snap the pin into the connector housing.


3. Push the pin into the connector until it locks.
4. A special extractor tool must be used when removing pins or sockets
from industrial connectors.

C - 3: Customer connections on controller


The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Outline diagram

The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit is made up of two identical chains of


switches.
The diagram shows the available customer connections, AS, GS and ES.

3HAC 16638-1

81

Controller
Electrical connections

A
E
C
D

H
J
R

N
P

xx0100000174

82

ES (emergency stop)

LS (Limit switch)

Solid state switches

Contactor

Mains

Drive unit

Second chain interlock

GS (general mode safeguarded space stop)

AS (Automatic mode safeguarded space stop)

ED (TPU enabling device)

Manual mode

Motor

Automatic mode

Operating mode selector

RUN

EN1

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

EN2

Function of the
MOTORS ON/
MOTORS OFF circuit

The circuit monitors all safety related equipment and switches. If any of the
switches is opened, the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit switches the power
to the motors off.

Connection of
safety chains

The diagram below shows the two-channel safety chain.

3HAC 16638-1

As long as the two chains are not identical, the robot will remain in MOTORS
OFF mode.

The supply from internal 24V (X3/X4:12) and 0 V (X3/X4:7) is displayed. For an
external supply of GS and AS, X3/X4:10,11 is connected to 24V and X3/X4:8,9
is connected to external 0V. Connection tables for X1-X4 are given in "External
customer connections on panel X1 - X4".

83

Controller
Electrical connections

24V
X3:12
X4:12

Ext LIM1
24V

K1
0V

X1:11 12
ES1

X3:10

Opto GS1
isol.
TPU En1

8
11

&

Opto AS1
isol.

Auto1

K1

EN
Run

Intern
locking

K2

Man1

External contactors
0V
24 V
0V

X3:3
X4:3

4
4

CONT1
CONT2

Ext LIM2
X2:11 12

K2

Opto GS2
isol.
TPU En2

11
9

Drive Unit

ES2

X4:10

24 V

&

Opto AS2
isol.
Auto2

Man2

xx0100000166

Technical data per chain

84

Limit switch

Load: 300 mV
Max. voltage drop: 1 V

External connectors

Load: 10 mA
Max. voltage drop: 4 V

GS/AS load at 24 V

25 mA

GS/AS closed "1"

>18 V

GS/AS open "0"

<5V

External supply of GS/AS

Max. + 35 VDC
Min. - 35 VDC

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Technical data per chain

3HAC 16638-1

Max. potential in relation to the cabinet


earthing and other signal groups

300 V

Signal class

Control signals

85

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of
ES1/ES2 on panel
unit

The diagram below shows the terminals for the emergency circuits.
The supply from internal 24V (X1/X2:10) and 0V (X1/X2:10) is displayed. For
an ext. supply, X1/X2:3 is connected to ext. 24V and X1/X2:8 is connected to ext.
0V (dotted lines).
A
24V 0V
B

X1:3

1:4

X1:7
X1:10

X1:9

X1:8
X1:1
X1:2

24V

X1:6
E
24V

G
24V 0V

F
B

2:4

X2:7
X2:8
X2:1
X2:2

24V

X2:6
H
24V
X2:4
X2:5
J
xx0100000191

86

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Internal

Ext shop

TPU

Cabinet

ES1 internal

Run chain 1 top

Internal

ES2 internal

Run chain 2 top

Technical data

3HAC 16638-1

ES1 and ES2 max output voltage

120 VAC or 48 VDC

ES1 and ES2 max output current

120 VAC: 4 A
48 VDC L/R: 50 mA
24 VDC L/R: 2 A
24 VDC R load: 8 A

External supply of ES relay

Min. 22 V between terminals X1:9, 8


and X2:9, 8 respectively

Rated current per chain

40 mA

Max. potential in relation to the cabinet


earthing and other signal groups

300 V

Signal class

Control signals

87

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to
MOTORS ON/
MOTORS OFF
contactor

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.
A
B

X3:2
1
X4:2
1
xx0100000193

K1 (Motor on/off 1)

K1 (Motor on/off 2)

Technical data

88

Max. voltage

48 VDC

Max. current

4A

Max. potential in relation to the cabinet


earthing and other signal groups

300 V

Signal class

Control signals

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to
operating mode
selector

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.

S1.1.x1 8
A

7
6
5

S1.1.x1 4
D

3
2
1

xx0100000197

Auto 1

MAN1

100% (Option)

Auto 2

MAN2

100% (Option)

Technical data

3HAC 16638-1

Max. voltage

48 VDC

Max. current

4A

Max. potential in relation to the cabinet


earthing and other signal groups

300 V

Signal class

Control signals

89

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to
brake contactor

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.
A

X4:5
6

xx0100000199

K3 (Brake)

Technical data

90

Max. voltage

48 VDC

Max. current

4A

Max. potential in relation to the cabinet


earthing and other signal groups

300 V

Signal class

Control signals

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

External customer connections on panel X1 - X4

Outline diagram

The diagram shows the customer connections X1 - X4 located on the panel unit.
WARNING
REMOVE JUMPERS BEFORE CONNECTING
ANY EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

xx0100000205

grey field

Connection of X1:
12-pole type
Phoenix COMBICON connector

3HAC 16638-1

Jumper

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X1.


The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

Terminal no. Comment

ES1 out: A

Emergency stop out chain 1

ES1 out: B

Emergency stop out chain 1

ES1 top

Top of emergency stop chain 1

24 V panel

+ 24 V emergency stop chain 1 and run chain 1

Run ch1 top

Top of run chain 1

ES1 internal

Internal signal from emergency stop relay chain 1

Sep. ES1: A

Separated emergency stop chain 1

Sep. ES1: B

Separated emergency stop chain 1

91

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of X2:
12-pole type
Phoenix COMBICON connector

Connection of X3:
12-pole type
Phoenix COMBICON connector

Signal

Terminal no. Comment

ES1 bottom

Bottom of emergency stop chain 1

0V

10

0 V emergency stop chain 1

Ext. LIM1: A

11

External limit switch chain 1

Ext. LIM1: B

12

External limit switch chain 1

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X2.


The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

Terminal no. Comment

ES2 out: A

Emergency stop out chain 2

ES2 out: B

Emergency stop out chain 2

ES2 top

Top of emergency stop chain 2

0V

0 V emergency stop chain 2

Run ch2 top

Top of run chain 2

ES2 internal

Internal signal from emergency stop relay chain 2

Sep. ES2: A

Separated emergency stop chain 2

Sep. ES2: B

Separated emergency stop chain 2

ES2 bottom

Bottom of emergency stop chain 2

24 V panel

10

+ 24 V emergency stop chain 1 and run chain 2

Ext. LIM2: A

11

External limit switch chain 2

Ext. LIM2: B

12

External limit switch chain 2

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X3.


The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

92

Terminal no. Comment

Ext. MON 1: A 1

Motor contactor 1

Ext. MON 1: B 2

Motor contactor 1

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of X4:
12-pole type
Phoenix COMBICON connector

Signal

Terminal no. Comment

0V

External contactor 1 0 V

CONT1

External contactor 1

No connection

No connection

0V

0 V to auto stop (AS) and general stop (GS)

GS1-

General stop minus chain 1

AS1-

Auto stop minus chain 1

GS1+

10

General stop plus chain 1

AS1+

11

Auto stop plus chain 1

24 V panel

12

24 V to auto stop and general stop

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X4.


The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

3HAC 16638-1

Terminal no. Comment

Ext. MON 2: A 1

Motor contactor 2

Ext. MON 2: B 2

Motor contactor 2

24 V panel

External contactor 2 24 V

CONT2

External contactor 2

Ext. BRAKE A 5

Contactor for external brake

Ext. BRAKE B 6

Contactor for external brake

0V

0 V to auto stop (AS) and general stop (GS)

GS2-

General stop minus chain 2

AS2-

Auto stop minus chain 2

GS2+

10

General stop plus chain 2

AS2+

11

Auto stop plus chain 2

24 V panel

12

24 V to auto stop and general stop

93

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of external safety relay

Description

The motor contactors K1 and K2 in the controller can operate with external equipment if external relays are used.
The figure below shows two examples of how to connect the external safety
relays:

94

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection
examples

X4:4
CONT 2
24 V X4:3
E xt MON 2
X4:2

0V

K2
X4:1
X3:2
K1
E xt MON 1

X3:1

24 V

0 V X3:3
CONT 1 X3:4

E
AS

AS

GS

GS

F
G

E
K
H
J
xx0100000246

3HAC 16638-1

Panel unit

95

Controller
Electrical connections

Relays with positive action

Robot 1

Robot 2

External supply

ES (emergency stop) out

Safety relay

To other equipment

Safety gate

Cell ES (emergency stop)

C - 4: Supplies
External 24V supply

When is an external supply recommended?

How to connect
the external supply

An external supply is recommended to make use of the advantages offered by the


galvanic insulation on the I/O units or on the panel unit.
An external supply must be used in the following cases:

When the internal supply is insufficient

When the emergency stop circuits must be independent of whether or not


the robot has power on, for example.

When there is a risk that major interference can be carried over into the
internal 24V supply.

The external supply neutral wire must be connected to the chassis such that the
maximum permitted potential difference in the chassis earth is not exceeded. For
example, a neutral wire can be connected to the chassis earth of the controller, or
some other common earthing point.

Technical data
Potential difference to chassis earth Max. 60 V continuously
Max. 500 V during 1 minute

96

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Permitted supply voltage

3HAC 16638-1

I/O units 19 VDC - 35 VDC incl. ripple


Panel unit 20.6 VDC - 30 VDC incl. ripple

97

Controller
Electrical connections

24V I/O supply

General

24 VDC supply for


internal and
external use

24 VDC supply
available at XT 31

98

The 24V I/O is not galvanically separated from the rest of the controller voltages.

Voltage

24.0 - 26.4V

Ripple

Max. 0.2V

Permitted customer load

Max. 7A

Current limit

13,5 ~0A.

24V I/O available for customer connections at XT 31 is shown in the figure in


"Connections to screw terminals".

XT.31.2

24 V (through a 2 A fuse)

XT.31.1

for own fuses

XT.31.4

0 V (connected to cabinet structure)

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

115/230 VAC supply

General

115/230 VAC supply for internal


and external use

115/230 VAC supply available at XT


21

This voltage is used in the robot for supplying optional service outlets. The AC
supply is not galvanically separated from the rest of the controller voltages.

Voltage

115 VAC or 230 VAC

Permitted customer load

Max. 500 VA

Fuse size, 115 V

6.3 A

Fuse size, 230 V

3.15 A

115 VAC/230 VAC available for customer connections at XT 21 is shown in the


figure in "Connection to screw terminals".

XT.21.1-5

230 VAC

XT.21.6-8

115 VAC

XT.21.9-13

N (connected to cabinet structure)

C - 5: Buses
Connection of the CAN bus

Illustration

3HAC 16638-1

The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the CAN bus:

99

Controller
Electrical connections

C
A

X15 CAN1.1 (Internal I/O)

X6 CAN1.2
X7 CAN1.3

G
D

D
E

X15, X6, X7

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

0V_CAN
CAN_L
drain
CAN_H
24V_I/O

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

xx0100000241

100

Base connector unit

CAN bus

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Control cabinet

I/O

Termination of last unit

120 ohm, 1%, 0.25 W metal film resistor

See figure in section "CAN 2" below!

CAN 1.1

Used for internal I/O unit mounted inside the cabinet. No terminating resistor is
fitted on CAN 1.1 regardless of whether any I/O units are used or not. CAN 1.1 is
connected to socket X15 on the Base connector unit (see Connection of the CAN
bus).

CAN 1.2

If CAN 1.2 is not used, a terminating resistor must be connected to the X6 socket
(exceptional case see below!).
If CAN 1.2 is used, the terminating resistor should be moved to the last I/O unit
on the CAN 1.2 chain.
If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be
mounted in CAN 1.3. This is in accordance with the basic rule, i.e. the CAN chain
should be terminated in both end points.

CAN 1.3

If CAN 1.3 is unused, a terminating resistor must be connected to the X7 socket.


If CAN 1.3 is used, the terminating resistor should be moved to the last I/O unit
on the CAN 1.3 chain.
If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be
mounted in CAN 1.3. This is in accordance with the basic rule, i.e. the CAN chain
should be terminated in both end points.

3HAC 16638-1

101

Controller
Electrical connections

Termination
resistors in CAN
bus

The CAN chain must be terminated with terminating resistors at each end!

CAN 2

The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the CAN 2 bus:

If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be
mounted in CAN 1.3.

B
D

X8 CAN 2

1. 0V_CAN
2. CAN_L
3. drain
4. CAN_H
5. 24V_I/O

X8

1. 0V_CAN
2. CAN_L
3. drain
4. CAN_H
5. 24V_I/O

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

xx0100000242

102

Controller

Base connector unit

See figure in section "Illustration" above!

I/O

Termination of last unit

120 ohm, 1%, 0.25 W metal film resistor

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

The illustration below shows CAN connections on base connector unit:

A
B
C
D

xx0100000243

3HAC 16638-1

X6 CAN 1.2 (external I/O)

X7 CAN 1.3 (external I/O)

X8 CAN 2 (external I/O)

X15 CAN 1.1 (internal I/O)

103

Controller
Electrical connections

Interbus-S, slave DSQC 351

General

The unit can be operated as a slave for an Interbus-S system.

Supply

The Interbus-S slave must be fed externally to avoid shutting down the InterbusS net if a robot cell is switched off. The 24V power supply must be fed from
outside the control cabinet and be connected to pin 2 on the Phoenix connector
located on the Interbus-S cards front panel marked 24V.

Technical data

Also see the Interbus-S specification.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Unit ID

The unit ID to be entered in the Interbus-S master is 3. The length code depends
on the selected data. Width between 1 and 4.

Layout, DSQC
351

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 351 board:

104

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

X20

X21

X5

X3

xx0100000225

Communication
concept

X3

Power connector

X5

DeviceNet connector

X20

Interbus-S, input

X21

Interbus-S, output

The Interbus-S system is able to communicate with a number of external devices,


depending on the number of process words occupied by each unit. The robot may
be equipped with one or two DSQC 351. The Interbus-S inputs and outputs are
accessible in the robot as general inputs and outputs.
For application data, refer to Interbus-S, International Standard, DIN 19258.
An outline diagram of the communication concept is shown below:

3HAC 16638-1

105

Controller
Electrical connections

E
A

B
In

C
Out

In
*1

D
Out

In

Out

*1

xx0100000224

Master PLC

Robot 1, word 1:3

Robot 1, word 4:7

Robot 2, word 8:11

128 inputs/128 outputs

64 inputs/64 outputs

*1

xx

Termination link

A link is connected between pins 5 and 9 in the plug on the interconnection cable
connected to the OUT connector of each unit. The link informs the Interbus-S unit
that more units are connected further out in the chain. (The last unit in the chain
does not have a cable connected and therefore no link).

Connections, X5
DeviceNet connectors

See DeviceNet Connectors.

106

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X20,
Interbus-S IN

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X20, Interbus-S IN:

Connections,
connector X21,
Interbus-S OUT

Signal name

X20 pin

Function

TPDO1

Communication line TPDO1

TPDI1

Communication line TPDI1

GND

Ground connection

NC

Not connected

NC

Not connected

TPDO1-N

Communication line TPDO1-N

TPDI1-N

Communication line TPDI1-N

NC

Not connected

NC

Not connected

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X21, Interbus-S OUT:

3HAC 16638-1

107

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X3

Signal name

X21 pin

Function

TPDO2

Communication line TPDO2

TPDI2

Communication line TPDI2

GND

Ground connection

NC

Not connected

+5V

+ 5 VDC

TPDO2-N

Communication line TPDO2-N

TPDI2-N

Communication line TPDI2-N

NC

Not connected

RBST

Synchronization

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Bus status LEDs

108

Signal name

X3 pin

Function

0 VDC

External supply of Interbus-S

NC

Not connected

GND

Ground connection

NC

Not connected

+ 24 VDC

+ 24 VDC

The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC
352" above.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the
board.

3HAC 16638-1

Designation

Color

Description

POWER-24 VDC

Green

Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and


has a level above 12 VDC.

NS/MS

Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

CAN Tx/CAN Rx

Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

POWER- 5 VDC

Green

Lit when both 5 VDC supplies are within limits, and no reset is active.

RBDA

Red

Lit when this Interbus-S station is last in the


Interbus-S network.
If it is not (which is required), check parameter setup.

BA

Green

Lit when Interbus-S is active.


If there is no light, check network, nodes and
connections.

RC

Green

Lit when Interbus-S communication runs


without errors.

109

Controller
Electrical connections

Profibus-DP, slave DSQC 352

General

The unit can be operated as a slave for a Profibus-DP system.

Supply

The Profibus does not need any external power supply. All the robot cells are
connected to the trunk cable through a special D-sub connector which works as a
very short drop cable. Because of this the profibus will work correctly even if a
robot cell is turned off.

Technical data

Also see the Profibus-DP specification, International Standard DIN E 19245, part
3.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals.
Also see the Circuit diagram.

Layout, DSQC
352

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 352 board:

110

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

X20

X5

X3

xx0100000223

Communication
concept

X3

Power connector

X5

DeviceNet connector

X20

Profibus connection

The Profibus-DP system is able to communicate with a number of external


devices, depending on the number of process words occupied by each unit. The
robot may be equipped with one or two DSQC 352. The Profibus-DP inputs and
outputs are accessible in the robot as general inputs and outputs.
An outline diagram of the communication concept is shown below:

E
A

F
C

xx0100000222

3HAC 16638-1

111

Controller
Electrical connections

Master PLC

Robot 1, word 1:8

Robot 1, word 9:16

Robot 2, word 17:24

256 inputs/256 outputs

128 inputs/128 outputs

Termination

The Profibus cable must be terminated in both ends.

Connections, X5
DeviceNet connectors

See "Device Net Connectors".

Connections,
connector X20,
Profibus-DP

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X20, Interbus-S IN:

112

Signal name

X20 pin

Function

Shield

Cable screen

NC

Not connected

RxD/TxD-P

Receive/Transmit data P

Control-P

GND

+5 VDC

Ground

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X3

Signal name

X20 pin

Function

NC

Not connected

RxD/TxD-N

Receive/Transmit data N

NC

Not connected

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Bus status LEDs

Signal name

X3 pin

Function

0 VDC

External supply of Profibus-DP

NC

Not connected

GND

Ground connection

NC

Not connected

+ 24 VDC

External supply of Profibus-DP

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the
board.
The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC
352" above.

3HAC 16638-1

Designation

Color

Description

Profibus active

Green

Lit when the node is communicating with the


master.
If there is no light, check system messages in
robot and in Profibus net.

113

Controller
Electrical connections

Designation

Color

Description

NS/MS

Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

CAN Tx/CAN Rx

Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

POWER, 24 VDC Green

Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and


has a level above 12 VDC.
If there is no light, check that voltage is
present in the power unit and in the power
connector. If not, check cables and connectors.
If power is applied to the unit but it does not
work, replace the unit.

C - 6: I/O units
Distributed I/O units

General

Up to 20 units can be connected to the same controller but only four of these can
be installed inside the controller. Normally a distributed I/O unit is placed outside
the controller.

Connection

The maximum total length of the distributed I/O cable is 100 m (from one end of
the chain to the other end).
The controller can be one of the end points or be placed somewhere in the middle
of the chain.

Parameter setup

114

For setup parameters, see Users Guide, section System Parameters, Topic: I/O
Signals.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Distributed I/O, digital sensors

General

Digital sensors are connected to one optional digital unit.

Technical data

See Product Specification for Controller S4Cplus.

Allowed types of
digital sensors

The table below shows the allowed types of digital sensors to be used, and their
signal levels respectively:

3HAC 16638-1

Sensor type

Signal level

Digital one bit sensor

High, "1"
Low, "0"

Digital two bit sensor

High, "01"
No signal, "00"
Low, "10"
Error status, "11" (stop program running)

115

Controller
Electrical connections

Distributed I/O, digital I/O DSQC 328 (option)

General

The digital I/O unit handles digital communication between the robot system and
any external systems.

Technical data
No. of inputs

16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from


each other)

No. of outputs

16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from


each other)

Supply voltage

24 VDC

Supply source

24 V I/O or separate external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC
328

The figure below show the layout of the DSQC328 board:


A

OUT

MS

IN

NS

X1

X3

OUT
9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

IN

X2
1

10

10

X4
1

10

10

12

X5

xx0100000240

116

Status LEDs

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X1

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made


to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the
RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide.
The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Connections,
connector X2

Unit function

Signal name

X1 pin

Optically isolated output

Out ch 1

Optically isolated output

Out ch 2

Optically isolated output

Out ch 3

Optically isolated output

Out ch 4

Optically isolated output

Out ch 5

Optically isolated output

Out ch 6

Optically isolated output

Out ch 7

Optically isolated output

Out ch 8

Optically isolated output

0 V for outputs 1-8

Optically isolated output

24 V for outputs 1-8

10

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made


to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the
RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide.
The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

3HAC 16638-1

Unit function

Signal name

X2 pin

Optically isolated output

Out ch 9

Optically isolated output

Out ch 10

Optically isolated output

Out ch 11

Optically isolated output

Out ch 12

Optically isolated output

Out ch 13

Optically isolated output

Out ch 14

Optically isolated output

Out ch 15

117

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X3

Unit function

Signal name

X2 pin

Optically isolated output

Out ch 16

Optically isolated output

0 V for outputs 9-16

Optically isolated output

24 V for outputs 9-16

10

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Unit function

Signal name

X3 pin

Optically isolated input

In ch 1

Optically isolated input

In ch 2

Optically isolated input

In ch 3

Optically isolated input

In ch 4

Optically isolated input

In ch 5

Optically isolated input

In ch 6

Optically isolated input

In ch 7

Optically isolated input

In ch 8

Optically isolated input

0 V for inputs 1-8

Optically isolated input

Not used

10

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected
to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the
input.
When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor
(100 W) may be used.

Connections,
connector X4

118

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Unit function

Signal name

X4 pin

Optically isolated input

In ch 9

Optically isolated input

In ch 10

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Unit function

Signal name

X4 pin

Optically isolated input

In ch 11

Optically isolated input

In ch 12

Optically isolated input

In ch 13

Optically isolated input

In ch 14

Optically isolated input

In ch 15

Optically isolated input

In ch 16

Optically isolated input

0 V for inputs 9-16

Optically isolated input

Not used

10

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected
to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the
input.
When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor
(100 W) may be used.

3HAC 16638-1

119

Controller
Electrical connections

AD Combi I/O, DSQC 327 (optional)

General

The digital I/O unit handles digital and analog communication between the robot
system and any external systems.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs

16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated


from each other)

No. of digital outputs

16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated


from each other)

No. of analog outputs

2 (galvanically isolated from the controller electronics)

Supply voltage

24 VDC

Supply source, digital I/O

24 V I/O or separate external supply

Supply source, analog I/O 24 V_CAN (with galvanically isolated DC/AC converter)

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC
327

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC327 board:

120

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

OUT

MS

IN

NS

X1

X3

10

11

12

13

14

15

IN

X2
1

10

X4

10

X6
1

10

OUT

16

10

12

X5
xx0100000239

Status LEDs

Connector X5 is a CAN connector further described in section "Connection and


address keying of the CAN bus".

Connections,
connector X1

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made


to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the
RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide.
The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

3HAC 16638-1

Unit function

Signal name

X1 pin

Optically isolated output

Out ch 1

Optically isolated output

Out ch 2

Optically isolated output

Out ch 3

Optically isolated output

Out ch 4

Optically isolated output

Out ch 5

Optically isolated output

Out ch 6

Optically isolated output

Out ch 7

Optically isolated output

Out ch 8

Optically isolated output

0 V for outputs 1-8

Optically isolated output

24 V for outputs 1-8

10

121

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X2

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made


to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the
RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide.
The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Connections,
connector X3

122

Unit function

Signal name

X2 pin

Optically isolated output

Out ch 9

Optically isolated output

Out ch 10

Optically isolated output

Out ch 11

Optically isolated output

Out ch 12

Optically isolated output

Out ch 13

Optically isolated output

Out ch 14

Optically isolated output

Out ch 15

Optically isolated output

Out ch 16

Optically isolated output

0 V for outputs 9-16

Optically isolated output

24 V for outputs 9-16

10

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Unit function

Signal name

X3 pin

Optically isolated input

In ch 1

Optically isolated input

In ch 2

Optically isolated input

In ch 3

Optically isolated input

In ch 4

Optically isolated input

In ch 5

Optically isolated input

In ch 6

Optically isolated input

In ch 7

Optically isolated input

In ch 8

Optically isolated input

0 V for inputs 1-8

Optically isolated input

Not used

10

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X4

Connections,
connectors X6

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Unit function

Signal name

X4 pin

Optically isolated input

In ch 9

Optically isolated input

In ch 10

Optically isolated input

In ch 11

Optically isolated input

In ch 12

Optically isolated input

In ch 13

Optically isolated input

In ch 14

Optically isolated input

In ch 15

Optically isolated input

In ch 16

Optically isolated input

0 V for inputs 9-16

Optically isolated input

Not used

10

The table below shows the connections to connectors X6:

Signal name:

X6 pin:

Explanation:

AN_ICH1

For test purposes only

AN_ICH2

For test purposes only

0V

0 V for In channels 1-2

0 VA

0 V for Out channels 1-2

AN_OCH1

Out channels 1

AN_OCH2

Out channels 2

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected
to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the
input.
When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor
(100 W) may be used.

3HAC 16638-1

123

Controller
Electrical connections

Analog I/O, DSQC 355 (optional)

General

The analog I/O unit handles communication between the robot system and any
external systems through analog sensors.

Technical data
No. of analog inputs

4 (-10 V/+10 V)

No. of analog outputs

3 (-10 V/+10 V)
1 (4-20 mA))

No. of analog outputs

2 (galvanically isolated from the controller electronics)

Supply voltage

24 VDC

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC
355

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 355 board:

124

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

X7

X8

X8

Bus s tatus

X7

S2S3
X2
X5 X3
Analog I/O

DS QC 355

X5

AB B F lexible Automation

X3

xx0100000238

Connections,
connectors X7
analog output

X3

Not used

X5

DeviceNet input and ID connector

X7

Analog outputs

X8

Analog inputs

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

13

12

24

xx0100000236

3HAC 16638-1

125

Controller
Electrical connections

The table below shows the connections to connector X7:

Signal name: X7 pin:

Explanation:

ANOUT_

Analog output 1, -10 V/+10 V

ANOUT_

Analog output 2, -10 V/+10 V

ANOUT_

Analog output 3, -10 V/+10 V

ANOUT_

Analog output 4, 4-20 mA

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

11

Not used

12

Not used

13

Not used

14

Not used

15

Not used

16

Not used

17

Not used

18

GND

19

Analog output 1, 0 V

GND

20

Analog output 2, 0 V

GND

21

Analog output 3, 0 V

GND

22

Analog output 4, 0 V

GND

23

GND

24

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected
to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the
input.
Connect a resistor (100 W) in series when connecting outputs, sensitive to preoscillation current.

126

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connectors X8
analog input

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

17

16

32

xx0100000237

The table below shows the connections to connector X8:

3HAC 16638-1

Signal name: X8 pin:

Explanation:

ANIN_1

Analog input 1, -10 V/+10 V

ANIN_2

Analog input 2, -10 V/+10 V

ANIN_3

Analog input 3, -10 V/+10 V

ANIN_4

Analog input 4, -10 V/+10 V

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

11

Not used

12

Not used

13

Not used

14

Not used

15

Not used

16

+24 V out

17

+24 VDC supply

127

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name: X8 pin:

Explanation:

+24 V out

18

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

19

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

20

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

21

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

22

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

23

+24 VDC supply

+24 V out

24

+24 VDC supply

GND

25

Analog input 1, 0 V

GND

26

Analog input 2, 0 V

GND

27

Analog input 3, 0 V

GND

28

Analog input 4, 0 V

GND

29

GND

30

GND

31

GND

32

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected
to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the
input.
Connect a resistor (100 W) in series when connecting outputs, sensitive to preoscillation current.

Bus status LEDs

128

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the
board.

Designation

Color

Description

NS/MS

Green/
red

See section 4.1.

RS232 Rx

Green

Indicates the state of the RS232 Rx line.


LED is active when receiving data. If there is no
light, check communication line and connections.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Designation

Color

Description

RS232 Tx

Green

Indicates the state of the RS232 Tx line. LED is


active when transceiving data.
If there is no light when transmission is expected,
check error messages and check also system
boards in rack.

Green

Indicates that supply voltage is present and at


correct level.
If there is no light, check that voltage is present
on power unit and that power is present in power
connector. If not, check cables and connectors.
If power is applied to the unit but it does not work,
replace the unit.

+5VDC / +12VDC /
-12VDC

3HAC 16638-1

129

Controller
Electrical connections

Encoder interface unit, DSQC 354 (optional)

General

The encoder interface unit handles communication with an external conveyor:

One encoder input (synchronization of conveyor position with robot movements). The encoder is supplied with 24 V and 0 V, and sends position
information on two channels. This information is computed by the on-board
computer using quadrature decoding (QDEC) to determine position and
direction.

One digital input (external start signal/conveyor synchronization point)

Technical data
No. of encoder inputs

No. of digital inputs

1 (24 VDC)

Supply voltage

24 VDC

Supply source

24 V I/O or external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

130

User reference Description Conveyor Tracking. For setup parameters, see Users
Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Layout, DSQC
354

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 354 board:

X20

X5

X3

xx0100000233

3HAC 16638-1

X3

Not used

X5

DeviceNet input and ID connector

X20

Conveyor connection

131

Controller
Electrical connections

Encoder connections

The figure below shows the encoder connections:


AF
AA
AB
24 VDC
0V
AC

A
B
24 VDC

AD

0V

AE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Opto
Opto

Opto

Opto
Opto

Opto

AG

xx0100000234

132

AA

24 V I/O or external supply

AB

0 V I/O or external supply

AC

Encoder

AD

Sync switch

AE

10-16 not used

AF

Encoder unit

AG

Galvanic isolation

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connectors X20
encoder and digital input connections

The table below shows the connections to connector X20:

Signal name: X20 pin:

Explanation:

24 VDC

24 VDC supply

0V

0V

ENC

Encoder 24 VDC

ENC

Encoder 0 VDC

ENC_A

Encoder phase A

ENC_B

Encoder phase B

DIGIN

Synchronization switch 24 VDC

DIGIN

0V

DIGIN

Synchronization switch digital input

Not used

10

Not used

11

Not used

12

Not used

13

Not used

14

Not used

15

Not used

16

The figure below shows the layout of the pins in connector X20:

16

xx0100000235

3HAC 16638-1

133

Controller
Electrical connections

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the
board.

Designation

Color

Description

POWER, 24 VDC Green

Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and


has a level above 12 VDC.
If there is no light, check that voltage is present
on power unit and in connector X20. If not, check
cables and connectors.
If power is applied to the unit but it does not
work, replace the unit.

NS/MS

Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

CAN Tx/CAN Rx Green/red

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

ENC 1A/1B

Indicates phase 1 and 2 from encoder. Flashes


at each Encoder pulse. At frequencies higher
than a few Hz, flashing can no longer be
observed (light will appear weaker).
If there is no light, there is an error due to one or
more of the following reasons:
Faulty power supply for input circuit
(internal or external).

Green

Defective input circuit on board.

Short circuit or broken wire in external


wiring or connectors.

Internal error in unit.

Constant light indicates constant high level on


input and vice versa.
No light on one LED indicates fault in one
encoder phase.

134

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

3HAC 16638-1

Designation

Color

Description

DIGIN1

Green

Digital input. Lit when digital input is active. The


input is used for external start signal/conveyor
synchronization point.
If there is no light, there is an error due to one or
more of the following reasons:
Faulty power supply for input circuit
(internal or external).

Faulty limit switch, photocell etc.

Short circuit or broken wire in external


wiring or connectors.

Defective input circuit on board.

135

Controller
Electrical connections

Relay I/O, DSQC 332 (optional)

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and any external systems through relay outputs and digital inputs.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs

16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from


each other)

No. of relay outputs

16 (a single normally open contact, isolated from each


other)

Supply voltage

24 VDC

Supply source

24 V I/O or separate external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC
332

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 332 board:
A

OUT

MS

IN

NS

OUT
9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

IN

X1

X2
16

16

X3

X4
16

16

12

X5

xx0100000232

136

Status LEDs

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X1

Connections,
connector X2

3HAC 16638-1

X1

See below for connection tables!

X2

See below for connection tables!

X3

See below for connection tables!

X4

See below for connection tables!

X5

CAN connection detailed in section "Connection of CAN bus"!

The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Signal name

X1 pin

Function

Out ch 1a

Contact, relay 1

Out ch 1b

Contact, relay 1

Out ch 2a

Contact, relay 2

Out ch 2b

Contact, relay 2

Out ch 3a

Contact, relay 3

Out ch 3b

Contact, relay 3

Out ch 4a

Contact, relay 4

Out ch 4b

Contact, relay 4

Out ch 5a

Contact, relay 5

Out ch 5b

10

Contact, relay 5

Out ch 6a

11

Contact, relay 6

Out ch 6b

12

Contact, relay 6

Out ch 7a

13

Contact, relay 7

Out ch 7b

14

Contact, relay 7

Out ch 8a

15

Contact, relay 8

Out ch 8b

16

Contact, relay 8

The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Signal name

X2 pin

Function

Out ch 9a

Contact, relay 9

137

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X3

138

Signal name

X2 pin

Function

Out ch 9b

Contact, relay 9

Out ch 10a

Contact, relay 10

Out ch 10b

Contact, relay 10

Out ch 11a

Contact, relay 11

Out ch 11b

Contact, relay 11

Out ch 12a

Contact, relay 12

Out ch 12b

Contact, relay 12

Out ch 13a

Contact, relay 13

Out ch 13b

10

Contact, relay 13

Out ch 14a

11

Contact, relay 14

Out ch 14b

12

Contact, relay 14

Out ch 15a

13

Contact, relay 15

Out ch 15b

14

Contact, relay 15

Out ch 16a

15

Contact, relay 16

Out ch 16b

16

Contact, relay 16

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal name

X3 pin

In ch 1

In ch 2

In ch 3

In ch 4

In ch 5

In ch 6

In ch 7

In ch 8

0 v for In ch 1-8

Not used

10

Not used

11

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X4

3HAC 16638-1

Signal name

X3 pin

Not used

12

Not used

13

Not used

14

Not used

15

Not used

16

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Signal name

X4 pin

In ch 9

In ch 10

In ch 11

In ch 12

In ch 13

In ch 14

In ch 15

In ch 16

0 v for In ch 9-16

Not used

10

Not used

11

Not used

12

Not used

13

Not used

14

Not used

15

Not used

16

139

Controller
Electrical connections

Digital I/O (120 VAC), DSQC 320 (optional)

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and any external systems through galvanically isolated outputs and inputs.

Technical data
No. of inputs

16 (galvanically isolated from each other)

No. of outputs

16 (galvanically isolated from each other)

Supply voltage

120 VAC

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller.
Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC
320

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 320 board:
A

OUT

MS

IN

NS

OUT
9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

IN

X1

X2
16

16

X3

X4
16

16

12

X5

xx0100000231

140

Status LEDs

X1

See below for connection tables!

X2

See below for connection tables!

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X1

Connections,
connector X2

3HAC 16638-1

X3

See below for connection tables!

X4

See below for connection tables!

X5

CAN connection detailed in section "Connection of CAN bus"!

The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Signal name X1 pin

Function

Out ch 1a

AC voltage to switch 1/AC output signal from switch 1

Out ch 1b

AC voltage to switch 1/AC output signal from switch 1

Out ch 2a

AC voltage to switch 2/AC output signal from switch 2

Out ch 2b

AC voltage to switch 2/AC output signal from switch 2

Out ch 3a

AC voltage to switch 3/AC output signal from switch 3

Out ch 3b

AC voltage to switch 3/AC output signal from switch 3

Out ch 4a

AC voltage to switch 4/AC output signal from switch 4

Out ch 4b

AC voltage to switch 4/AC output signal from switch 4

Out ch 5a

AC voltage to switch 5/AC output signal from switch 5

Out ch 5b

10

AC voltage to switch 5/AC output signal from switch 5

Out ch 6a

11

AC voltage to switch 6/AC output signal from switch 6

Out ch 6b

12

AC voltage to switch 6/AC output signal from switch 6

Out ch 7a

13

AC voltage to switch 7/AC output signal from switch 7

Out ch 7b

14

AC voltage to switch 7/AC output signal from switch 7

Out ch 8a

15

AC voltage to switch 8/AC output signal from switch 8

Out ch 8b

16

AC voltage to switch 8/AC output signal from switch 8

The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Signal
name

X2 pin

Function

Out ch 9a

AC voltage to switch 9/AC output signal from switch 9

Out ch 9b

AC voltage to switch 9/AC output signal from switch 9

141

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X3

142

Signal
name

X2 pin

Function

Out ch 10a

AC voltage to switch 10/AC output signal from switch 10

Out ch 10b

AC voltage to switch 10/AC output signal from switch 10

Out ch 11a

AC voltage to switch 11/AC output signal from switch 11

Out ch 11b

AC voltage to switch 11/AC output signal from switch 11

Out ch 12a

AC voltage to switch 12/AC output signal from switch 12

Out ch 12b

AC voltage to switch 12/AC output signal from switch 12

Out ch 13a

AC voltage to switch 13/AC output signal from switch 13

Out ch 13b

10

AC voltage to switch 13/AC output signal from switch 13

Out ch 14a

11

AC voltage to switch 14/AC output signal from switch 14

Out ch 14b

12

AC voltage to switch 14/AC output signal from switch 14

Out ch 15a

13

AC voltage to switch 15/AC output signal from switch 15

Out ch 15b

14

AC voltage to switch 15/AC output signal from switch 15

Out ch 16a

15

AC voltage to switch 16/AC output signal from switch 16

Out ch 16b

16

AC voltage to switch 16/AC output signal from switch 16

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal
name

X3 pin

Function

In ch 1a

AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1

In ch 1b

AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1

In ch 2a

AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2

In ch 2b

AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2

In ch 3a

AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3

In ch 3b

AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3

In ch 4a

AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4

In ch 4b

AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4

In ch 5a

AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5

In ch 5b

10

AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X4

3HAC 16638-1

Signal
name

X3 pin

Function

In ch 6a

11

AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6

In ch 6b

12

AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6

In ch 7a

13

AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7

In ch 7b

14

AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7

In ch 8a

15

AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

In ch 8b

16

AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Signal
name

X4 pin

Function

In ch 9a

AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1

In ch 9b

AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1

In ch 10a

AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2

In ch 10b

AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2

In ch 11a

AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3

In ch 11b

AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3

In ch 12a

AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4

In ch 12b

AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4

In ch 13a

AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5

In ch 13b

10

AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5

In ch 14a

11

AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6

In ch 14b

12

AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6

In ch 15a

13

AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7

In ch 15b

14

AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7

In ch 16a

15

AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

In ch 16b

16

AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

143

Controller
Electrical connections

C - 7: Communication
Communication concept, Allen-Bradley

General

The robot may communicate with the Allen Bradley system only, or be used in
combination with the I/O system in the robot. For example, the inputs to the robot
may come from the Allen Bradley system while the outputs from the robot control
external equipment go via general I/O addresses and the Allen Bradley system
only reads the outputs as status signals.

Definitions

The Allen Bradley system can communicate with up to 64 external systems. Each
of these systems is called a Rack and is given a Rack Address 0-63. Basically, each
robot connected to the Allen Bradley system will occupy one rack.
Each rack is divided into four sections called Quarters. Each quarter provides 32
inputs and 32 outputs and a rack will subsequently provide 128 inputs and 128
outputs. A rack may also be shared by 2, 3, or 4 robots. Each of these robots will
then have the same rack address, but different starting quarters must be specified.

144

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Illustration

The illustration below shows a block diagram of the Allen-Bradley system, where
Robot 1 uses a full rack while robot 2 and robot 3 share one rack. The rack address,
starting quarter, and other required parameters such as baud rate, LED status etc.
are entered in the configuration parameters.
Allen Bradley
control system

Robot 1 - 128 in / 128 out


Quarter 1
Quarter 2

Robot 2 - 64 in / 64 out
Quarter 1

128 in / 128 out

64 in / 64 out

Quarter 4
Rack ID 12 (example)
Rack size 4
Starting quarter 1

Quarter 1
Quarter 2

Quarter 2
Rack ID 13 (example)
Rack size 2
Starting quarter 1

Quarter 3

Other systems

Quarter 3
Quarter 4

Robot 3 - 64 in / 64 out
Quarter 3

64 in / 64 out

Quarter 4
Rack ID 13 (example)
Rack size 2
Starting quarter 3
en0100000255

3HAC 16638-1

145

Controller
Electrical connections

RIO, remote I/O for Allen-Bradley PLC DSQC 350

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and the Allen Bradley
system.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs

Unit is programmable for 32, 64, 96 or 128 digital inputs

No. of digital outputs

Unit is programmable for 32, 64, 96 or 128 digital outputs

Also see the Allen-Bradley RIO specification.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals.
Also see Circuit Diagram.

Connection

The RIO-unit should be connected to an Allen-Bradley PLC using a screened, two


conductor cable.

Layout, DSQC
350

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 350 board:

X5
X9

X3

X8
DS QC 350

AB B F lexible Automation

xx0100000226

146

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections,
connector X8

X3

Not used

X5

DeviceNet and ID connector

X8

RIO in

X9

RION out

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X8:

Connections,
connector X9

Signal name

X8 pin

Function

LINE1 (blue)

Remote I/O in

LINE2 (clear)

Remote I/O in

Shield

Remote I/O in

Cabinet ground

Remote I/O in

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X9:

3HAC 16638-1

Signal name

X9 pin

Function

Blue

Remote I/O out

Clear

Remote I/O out

Shield

Remote I/O out

Cabinet ground

Remote I/O out

147

Controller
Electrical connections

Termination

When the robot is last in a RIO loop, the loop must be terminated with a termination resistor according to Allen-Bradleys specification.

Warranty

This product incorporates a communications link which is licensed under patents


and proprietary technology of the Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. The Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. does not warrant or support this product. All warranty and support services for this product are the responsibility of and provided by ABB
Flexible Automation.

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the
board.
The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC
350" above.

Designation

Color

POWER-24 VDC Green

148

Description
Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and
has a level above 12 VDC.
If there is no light, check that voltage is present on
power unit and in power connector. If not, check
cables and connectors.
If power is applied to the unit but it does not work,
replace the unit.

NS/MS

Green/red See section "CAN bus status LED description".

CAN Tx/CAN Rx

Yellow

See section "CAN bus status LED description".

NAC STATUS

Green

Steady green indicates RIO link in operation.


If there is no light, check network, cables and
connections. Also check that PLC is operational.
Flashing green indicates that communication is
established, but the INIT_COMPLETE bit is not
set in NA chip, or configuration, rack size etc.
does not match configuration set in PLC.
If LED keeps flashing continuously, check setup

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Communication, serial links

General

Further information

Technical data

3HAC 16638-1

The robot has three serial channels, which can be used by the customer to communicate with printers, terminals, computers, and other equipment (see the figure
in "Connections" below).

COM1 (computer system) - RS 232 115 kbps. This was formerly referred
to as Com2.

COM2 - RS 232 with RTS-CTS-control and support for XON/XOFF, transmission speed 300 - 38 400 bps. This was formerly referred to as SIO1.

COM3 - RS 422 full duplex TXD4, TXD4-N, RXD4, RXD4-N, transmission


speed 300 - 38 400 bps. This was formerly referred to as SIO2.

For temporary use: MC/CONSOLE - RS 232 115 kbps. This was formerly
referred to as Com1.

For setup parameters, see User's Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O
Signals.

Circuit Diagram.

Location in the cabinet (see figure in section "Connection to screw terminals").

See Product Specification for controller S4Cplus. Separate documentation is


included when the option RAP Serial link is ordered.

149

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections

The figure below shows the connection of serial channels:

xx0100000219

External computer

Customer terminals, on base connector board: X10 (COM2) and X9 (COM3), see
section "Connection to screw terminals".

Connections on
DSQC 504, COM1

Standard RS232 port.


The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:
5

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the signals from the COM1 (RS232):

150

Signal

Pin

Description

DCD

Data carrier Detect

RX

Receive Data

TX

Transmit Data

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections on
DSQC 504, D-sub
connector X10,
COM2

Signal

Pin

Description

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

GND

Signal Ground

DSR

Data Set Ready

RTS

Request To Send

CTS

Clear To Send

RI

Ring Indicator

NC

10

Not Connected

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:


5

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X10:

COM2 Signal name

X10 pin
1

RxD (Receive Data)

TxD (Transmit Data)

DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

0V

DSR (Data Ready Set)

RTS N (Request To Send N)

CTS (Clear To Send)

8
9

3HAC 16638-1

151

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections on
DSQC 504, D-sub
connector X9,
COM3

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:


5

6
9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X9:

Connections to
MC/CONSOLE

COM3 Signal name

X9 socket

TxD (Transmit Data)

TxD N (Transmit Data N)

RxD (Receive Data)

RxD N (Receive data N)

0V

DATA (Data Signals in Half Duplex Mode)

DATA N (Data Signals in Half Duplex Mode N)

DCLK (Data Transmission Clock)

DCLK N (Data Transmission Clock N)

The figure below shows the MC/CONSOLE connection behind the service hatch:

xx0100000218

152

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

External computer

Standard RS232 port intended for temporary use, e.g. connection of laptop/PC.
The table below shows the signals on the MC/CONSOLE (RS232):

3HAC 16638-1

Signal

Pin

Description

RX

Receive Data

TX

Transmit Data

GND

Signal Ground

153

Controller
Electrical connections

Communication, Ethernet

General

Connection of
LAN (Main computer)

The robot has two Ethernet channels available:

LAN (connected to the Main computer)

Service (connected to the I/O computer)

The figure below shows an outline diagram of the Ethernet TCP/IP:

E thernet hub
xx0100000217

External computer

Controller Robot 1

Controller Robot 2

Used for connection of shielded twisted-pair Ethernet (TPE), or as defined in


IEEE 802.3: 10/100 BASE-T. Maximum node-to-node distance 100 meter. The
main computer board has no termination for a cable shield. The cable shield must
be grounded at the cabinet wall with a cable gland. 10BASE-T is a point-to-point
net, connected via a HUB, see the figure above.

154

Signal

X1 Pin

Description

TX+

Transmit data line +

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal

X1 Pin

Description

TX-

Transmit data line -

RX+

Receive data line +

NC

Not Connected

NC

Not Connected

RX-

Receive data line -

NC

Not Connected

NC

Not Connected

The figure below shows the main computer board front:


1

X1
LAN

PWR

HDD

STATUS

X2
xx0100000216

3HAC 16638-1

155

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of
Service (I/O Computer)

Used for connection of a laptop to the service outlet on the front of the controller
cabinet (behind service hatch).
The figure below shows how to connect a laptop to the service outlet:

E thernet

xx0100000215

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals.
Also see the Circuit Diagram. Separate documentation is included when the
option Ethernet services is ordered.

156

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Electrical connections

External operators panel

General

All necessary components are supplied, except for the external enclosure.

Dimensions for
installation

Install the assembled panel in a housing which satisfies protection class, IP 54, in
accordance with IEC 144 and IEC 529!
The figure below shows the main dimensions of the external operators panel:
A

B
M8 (x4)

M4 (x4)

62

C
45
70
140
184
200

E
90
5 (x2)

155

F
G

xx0100000214

3HAC 16638-1

Holes for operators panel

Holes for flange

157

Controller
Electrical connections

158

Required depth: 200 mm

External panel enclosure (option)

Holes for teach pendant unit (TPU) holder

Teach pendant unit (TPU) connector

Connection to the controller

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Start-up

Section D: Start-up
Inspection before start-up

General

Perform the following checks before starting up the robot system:

Check that:

1. the controller mains section is protected with fuses.


2. the electrical connections are correct and correspond to the identification plate on the controller.
3. the teach pendant and peripheral equipment are properly connected.
4. any limiting devices that establish the restricted space (when utilized)
are installed.
5. the physical environment is as specified.
6. the operating mode selector on the operators panel is in the Manual
mode position.
7. when external safety devices are used, check that these have been
connected or that the following circuits in either XS3 (connector on the
outside left cabinet wall) or X1-X4 (screw terminals on the panel unit)
are strapped:

3HAC 16638-1

Device

XS3

Panel unit

External limit switches

A5-A6, B5-B6

X1.3-4, X2.3-4

External emergency stop

A3-A4, B3-B4

X1.9-10, X2.9-10

External emergency stop


internal 24 V

A1-A2, B1-B2

X1.7-8, X2.7-8

General stop +

A11-A12, B11-B12

X3.10-12, X4.10-12

General stop -

A13-A14, B13-B14

X3.7-8, X4.7-8

Auto stop +

A7-A8, B7-B8

X3.11-12, X4.11-12

Auto stop -

A9-A10, B9-10

X3.7-9, X4.7-9

Motor off clamping

A15-A16, B15-16

X1.5-6, X2.5-6

159

Controller
Start-up

Start-up

General

1. Switch on the mains switch on the cabinet.


1. The robot performs its self-test on both the hardware and software,
which takes approximately 1 minute.
2. If the robot is not supplied with the software already installed, install the
software as described in chapter "Robot Controller".
A welcome message is shown on the Teach Pendant Unit display.

3. To switch from MOTORS OFF to MOTORS ON, press the enabling


device on the teach pendant.
4. Update the revolution counters as described in the Calibration chapter,
section "Updating the revolution counters".
5. IRB 940: Check the position of the spiral cable in the centre tube
sleeve. Correct position is described in the Calibration chapter, section
"Correct orientation of axes".
6. Check the calibration position as described in the Calibration chapter,
section "Checking the calibration position".
7. When the controller, with the manipulator electrically connected, is
powered up for the first time, ensure that the power supply is connected
for at least 36 hours continuously, in order to fully charge the batteries
for the serial measurement board. It takes approx. 4 hours to fully
charge a computer system battery.
8. After having checked the above, verify that:
the start, stop and mode selection (including the key lock switches) control
devices work as intended.
each axis moves and is restricted (if possible) as intended.
emergency stop and safety stop (where included) circuits and devices are
functional.
it is possible to disconnect and isolate the external power sources.
the teach and playback facilities work correctly.
the safeguarding is in place.

160

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Start-up

at reduced speed, the robot operates properly and has the capability to
handle the product or workpiece.
in automatic (normal) operation, the robot operates properly and has the
capability to perform the intended task at the rated speed and load.

9. The robot is now ready for operation.

Operating the
robot

3HAC 16638-1

Starting and operating the robot is described in the Users Guide. Before start-up,
make sure that the robot cannot collide with any other objects in the working
space.

161

Controller
Installation of controller software

Section E: Installation of controller software


Loading system software

General

The robot system may be delivered with or without system software. When the
system is not delivered with software, this must be downloaded in one of a number
of ways.

Software installed
on delivery

If the robot controller is ordered with the software installed on delivery, the controller software and settings are already stored in the storage memory and the
system is ready to use.

Software not
installed on delivery

If the robot controller is ordered and delivered without software or if you want to
reconfigure your system, the RobInstall tool must be used to install the controller
software. The RobInstall tool is included on the RobotWare CD-ROM (see section
"RobotWare CD-ROM"). The RobInstall tool can be used both for creation of the
controller software and for downloading it to the controller system.

Types of software
loading

A
B
C
D

E
xx0100000192

162

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

RobotWare CD-ROM to install RobInstall and System Pack on PC

Floppy Disks

IOC Ethernet (service) with delivered boot cable UTP-X

Connected to IOC

MC Ethernet (LAN) network in workshop

When downloading, the controller software can be transferred to the controller


storage memory in three ways as shown in the figure above.

Boot Image

using floppy disks,

using Ethernet connected direct to the IO computer (IOC) service outlet on


the front of the controller cubicle,

using Ethernet connected via a local area network (LAN) to the main computer (MC).

The transfer and installation of the controller software to the controller storage
memory via Ethernet or floppy disks is executed by a basic program named Boot
Image.
This basic program must always be in the storage memory. When starting the
controller, with no controller software installed, Boot Image will start and ask the
operator for controller software installation instructions. If the controller software
is already installed and a warm start is performed, Boot Image is not used. The
installed controller software can be deleted by a cold start and then the Boot Image
will be reactivated.

3HAC 16638-1

163

Controller
Installation of controller software

RobotWare CD-ROM
The CD contains all the System software and should therefore be treated and
stored carefully.

RobotWare CDROM contents

164

The RobotWare CD-ROM contains the following:

Contents

Description

1.

RobInstall

A PC tool used to create and install the controller operating system in the robot control system.

2.

Documentation

On-line documentation for the RobInstall application and the Controller Operating System
Package.

3.

Controller OS Package

Controller Operating System Package for


S4Cplus. This package includes all the software needed to create the controller operating
system with any ordered options. Please note
that it is possible to install different releases
with different versions of the same system
package (see section "Media Pool in the PC").

4.

Test Signal Viewer

A tool (created in LabView) for viewing MotionTest Signals (oscilloscope function) and also
for logging these signals.

5.

FTP Client

On the CD is also included a so called FTP client named Voyager. Please note that this is not
an ABB product but a shareware program,
which means that it can be installed and used
for a limited time, but that it has to be registered for permanent use. Registering means
that a certain fee must be paid to the vendor.
The FTP client is used to transport files manually between the PC and the robot controller
storage memory. These actions are carried out
in the same way as in a file manager or in Windows Explorer.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Installation of the
RobotWare on the
PC (except FTP
Client)

This section describes how to install the software delivered on the RobotWare
CD-ROM onto a PC hard drive, to be transferred to the robot system.
1. Insert the CD in your reader.
1. The Install Shield will automatically start and guide you through the
install process (if it does not start, double-click the CD icon on your PC).
When the setup type window is displayed, it is recommended to select
the Custom button. Then Next button will open the Select Components
window, where normally all the four options, RobInstall, Documentation, Controller OS Package and Test Signal Viewer should be marked
as selected.

Installation of the
FTP Client on the
PC

This section describes how to install the FTP Client onto a PC hard drive.
1. In the Explorer, select and open the directory "ftp" on the CD.
2. Double-click the file ftpvsetup.exe.
The Install Shield for the FTP client will start and guide you through the installation. Please read the "Readme" file for information about license regulations.

3HAC 16638-1

165

Controller
Installation of controller software

Installing new Robot Controller Software with RobInstall

General

Nomenclature

How to use RobInstall

166

Since most systems have the operating system installed already on delivery, the
RobotWare CD-ROM is normally not needed. However it should be used when:

creating a new controller operating system,

changing the current operating system configuration, e.g. concerning


included options.

In the text dealing with RobInstall, the following nomenclature is used:

Concept:

Means:

System pack

This is the RobotWare Controller Operating System Package


for S4Cplus, including all options, even if they are not ordered
and activated.

Key

This is a text string, or a special file with the text string, which
is used to define and open both the BaseWare and all ordered
RobotWare options.

System

This is a complete controller software, i.e. controller operating


system, based on the system pack and the key. It can also
include any user files to be added to the home directory on the
controller storage memory.

Robinstall is used to create and install the controller software in the S4Cplus robot
controller. With RobInstall, you can:

create a new system,

update an existing system,

download a system to the controller using the Ethernet connection,

create Boot Disks to transfer the system to the Controller.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Make sure RobInstall is


installed. If not, install it
according to the instructions in section "Installation of the RobotWare on
the PC".

2.

Click the start button on


your PC and select programs/ABB Robotics/RobInstall/RobInstall.

3.

The RobInstall start window will open.

xx0100000185

3HAC 16638-1

167

Controller
Installation of controller software

Create a new Robot Controller System

Setting up the
system
Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Start RobInstall as
described in section "How
to use Robinstall".

2.

Choose New to create a


new Robot Controller system as shown in the figure.

xx0100000179

3.

Enter a name for the new


controller system. Select
a saving location or use
the default directory, normally "Program
Files\ABB Robotics\system" (see the figure
below, position 1).

xx0100000180

4.

168

Enter the RobotWare key


or add from file. If added
from a file, files with the
extension .kxt should be
used (see the figure
above, position 2).

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

5.

Press OK. The configured


system will be displayed
in the next window (see
the figure below).

6.

If no external options or
parameters are to be
added or changed, press
Finish to create the new
controller system. Otherwise press Next to continue to "Additional Keys"
(see section "Add or
remove external
options").

xx0100000181

Add or remove
external options
Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

To add or remove external


options, press Next in the
screen shown in the last figure in section "Setting up the
system" or click on "Additional
Keys" in the menu to the left.

xx0100000182

3HAC 16638-1

169

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

Add or remove
additional system
parameters

Action

Illustration/Info

2.

Enter the key string for the


selected option and press
Add Key to list, or pressAdd
key from file to select a key
string file.

3.

To remove additional keys,


select the key in the Included
Additional Keys list and press
Remove Key.

4.

Press Finish to create the


controller system or press
Next to continue to "Parameter Data" (see section "Add or
remove additional system
parameters).

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

To add or remove additional parameters, press


Next in the screen shown
in the last figure in section
"Add or remove external
options" or click on
"Parameter Data" in the
menu to the left.

2.

Press Add to load manipulator calibration data (see


the figure above, position
1). This is the calib.cfg file
delivered on the Manipulator Parameter disk (see
section "The manipulator
parameter disk").

xx0100000183

170

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

Change options
or system pack
revision

Action

Illustration/Info

3.

To remove manipulator
calibration data, press
Remove.

4.

Press Add to load additional system parameters,


see pos. 2. All system
parameter files added
here will be automatically
loaded together with the
system, when the controller is restarted with the
new system.

5.

To remove additional
parameters, select the
parameter in the "Loaded
Additional Parameters" list
and press Remove.

6.

Press Finish to create the


controller system or press
Next to continue to
"Options" (see section
"Change options or system pack revision").

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

To change the option configuration, press Next in


the screen shown in the
figure below or click on
"Options" in the menu to
the left.

xx0100000184

3HAC 16638-1

171

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

172

Action

Illustration/Info

2.

To change the Teach Pendant Unit language, robot


type, or software options,
press Options (see the figure above, position 1).

3.

Normally the latest


release or revision of all
system packages and
option packages stored in
the media pool (see section "Media Pool in the
PC") will be used. If an
earlier revision should be
used, uncheck the check
mark and press Rev.
Select (see the figure
above, position 2). In the
new window select the
system package to use
and press OK.

4.

If you want the system to


start up in query mode, put
a mark in the query mode
selection square. For further details of the query
mode, see section "Start
in Query Mode".

5.

Press Finish to create the


controller system or press
Next to view the current
configuration.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Update the Robot Controller image

Actions
Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

To update an existing controller system, press


Update, see the figure
below.

xx0100000189

2.

Select a system in the system list and press OK, see


the figure above. Please
note that a pop up menu
can be shown by clicking
right mouse button. With
this menu Copy, Rename or
Delete can be selected for
the marked system.

xx0100000190

3HAC 16638-1

173

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

174

Action

Illustration/Info

The window displaying the


current configuration of the
system will be shown. Follow the instructions in sections "Add or remove
external options", "Add or
remove additional system
parameters" or "Change
options or system pack revision" to modify the system.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Transfer Robot Controller System using Ethernet connection

Selecting type of
set-up

Before a system can be downloaded to a robot controller using the RobInstall tool
some preparations and set up must be done. This may be done in one of two ways:

...then see instructions


in section:

If you are using:

...and continue
in section:

a direct connection between "If using a direct connection "Download Robot


PC and IOC service outlet
between PC and IOC service Controller System"
on controller
outlet on controller" below!
below!

If using a direct
connection
between PC and
IOC service outlet
on controller

3HAC 16638-1

Network Intranet connection "If using Network Intranet


with fixed IP addresses
connection with fixed IP
addresses " below!

"Download Robot
Controller System"
below!

Network Intranet connection "If using Network Intranet


with DHCP (Dynamic Host connection with DHCP "
Configuration Protocol)
below!

"Download Robot
Controller System"
below!

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Connect a patch-cable
between the Ethernet connection on the front of the
controller and the corresponding connection on
the PC/Laptop.

2.

Make sure that the Network protocol is set for


TCP/IP properties.

175

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

Action

Illustration/Info

Change the TCP/IP Properties in accordance with


the following table and figure:

xx0100000178

If using Network
Intranet connection with fixed IP
addresses

176

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Make sure that the Network protocol is set for TCP/


IP properties.

2.

Change the TCP/IP Properties in accordance with


the values to be used for IP address, Subnet mask
and Gateway.

3.

Perform a X-START (see section "x-START") or CSTART (see section "C-start") on the S4Cplus controller.

4.

Configure the IP address to be used for the robot


controller from the TPU.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

If using Network
Intranet connection with DHCP

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Read Ethernet MAC-id on the Teach Pendant Unit


(see section "LAN settings").

Download Robot
Controller System
Before downloading, check the following:
Make sure there is at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass storage
memory. For information on how to perform a manual storage capacity check, see
section "Check Storage Capacity".
Make sure that the robot controller displays the Start Window on the Teach Pendant Unit (see section "Start window").

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

To download a controller
system, press Download as
in the figure below:

xx0100000176

3HAC 16638-1

177

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

2.

Select a target system as in If a direct connection is used with the patch


the figure, position 1.
cable between the PC and the controller
front, then just select the default IP address
(192.168.125.1) and "Direct" option.
In other cases, write the correct IP address
for the robot controller and select "Hostname or IP-address". RobInstall will store
already used IP addresses, which can later
be selected with the down arrow.

3.

Type your username and


password if required by the
robot controller as in the figure below, position 2.

xx0100000177

4.

Test the connection by


pressing Test Connection
and press OK if a connection is established.

5.

Select a system in the list


on the left and press OK as
in the figure below. Please
note that it is possible to
select another system pool
than the shown one (in
such case be sure to select
the system pool directory,
not the system itself on the
lower level).

xx0100000175

178

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
6.

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Illustration/Info

RobInstall will now create a After downloading it is possible to restart


system file and download it the controller with the new downloaded
to the controller.
controller system. Otherwise, the controller
may be restarted from the Teach Pendant
Unit as detailed in section "Reboot".

179

Controller
Installation of controller software

Transfer Robot Controller System using floppy disks


Before downloading, make sure:
there is at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass storage memory. For
information on how to perform a manual storage capacity check, see section
"Check Storage Capacity".
that the robot controller displays the Start Window on the Teach Pendant Unit (see
section "Start Window").
an optional floppy disk drive is installed in the robot controller.

Create Boot Diskettes from RobInstall

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Press Create Boot Disk as


in the figure below.

xx0100000173

180

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
2.

Action

Illustration/Info

Select a system in the list


on the left and press OK as
in the figure below.
RobInstall will now create
an image file and estimate
the number of disks
needed.

xx0100000175

xx0100000188

3HAC 16638-1

3.

Insert a formatted 1.44 Mb


diskette into the disk drive.

4.

Press Continue to start


copy the Robot Controller
System image to the disks.

5.

Use the finished floppy


disks to boot your system
as described in section
"Boot Disks".

181

Controller
Installation of controller software

RobInstall preferences

Customizing RobInstall

RobInstall may be customized to suit particular requirements.

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

To customize RobInstall for


new programs and
optional products, press
Preferences as shown in
the figure. See also chapter "System Directory
Structure".

2.

To select another media


pool (see section "Media
Pool in the PC"), press
Select Media Pool as
shown in the figure, position 1.

xx0100000186

xx0100000187

182

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Illustration/Info

To add a new system package or option package to


the media pool, press
Import Program as shown
in the figure, position 2.
Also see chapter "System
Directory Structure".

183

Controller
Robot controller

Section F: Robot controller


BootImage

General

The BootImage is a basic program which is used to start up the system from
"scratch".

Purpose of the
program

This program is already installed in the controller at delivery and is used to:

184

restart the system

load the system from boot disks or network connections

set or check network settings

choose a system from the mass storage memory.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Start window

When is it
shown?

xx0100000168

The start window displays the start menu and will appear in the following cases:

When no controller operating system is installed at power on.

After X-START (see the part "How to perform a Restart").

After C-START (see the part "How to perform a Restart").

Possible actions

From this window you can choose to do one of the following:

Restart the system, Reboot

The BootImage will be re-executed, used to apply changes in the system settings
(see the part "Reboot Window").

Load a system
from diskettes,
Boot Disks

(See the part "Boot Disk Window".)

Set the network


settings, Network
Settings

Set network settings for the Main Computer or check how to configure your PC
(see the part "Network Settings Window").

3HAC 16638-1

185

Controller
Robot controller

Choose a system
from the mass
storage memory,
Select System

186

If there is one or more systems in the mass storage memory, you can choose to
activate one of them (see the part "System selection window").

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Reboot Window

When is it
shown?

The Reboot window will be displayed if any of the system settings are changed or
when Reboot is pressed in the Start window as shown in the figure below:.

xx0100000169

3HAC 16638-1

Button

Function

YES

Restarts the system

NO

Returns to the start window

187

Controller
Robot controller

Boot Disk Window

When is it
shown?

The Boot Disk window will be displayed when Boot Disks is pressed in the Start
window as shown in the figure in section "Start window".

How to create
boot disks

Information on how to create boot disks from RobInstall can be found in section
"Create Boot Diskettes from Robinstall".

Load the system


Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Insert the correct diskette in


the floppy disk drive and
press OK. If the diskette is
alright, the system will be
loaded.
CANCEL removes all previously loaded data and
returns to the Start window
as shown in the figure in
section "Start window".
xx0100000170

188

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Network Settings Window

When is it
shown?

The Network Settings window will be displayed when Network Settings is


pressed in the Start window as shown below.

xx0200000209

3HAC 16638-1

LAN Settings

Press to configure the Main Computer for communication with


a PC on a Local Area Network (LAN). Also see "LAN settings"!

Service Settings

Press to view the required settings for the PC to communicate


with the I/O Computer. Also see "Service settings"!

CANCEL

Press to return to the Start window as shown in figure "Start


window".

189

Controller
Robot controller

LAN Settings Window

When is it
shown?

The LAN Settings window will be displayed when LAN Settings is pressed in the
Network Settings window as shown in the figure in section "Network Settings".

en0100000256.gif

NONE

will, after the system is rebooted, remove the IP settings.

CANCEL

returns to the Start window, as shown in the figure in section


"Start Window", without changing any settings.

Node identification

190

Parameter

Type

Description

MAC ID

Node identification

The Main Computers ethernet address.

Current IP

Node identification

The Main Computers current IP address.


This row is blank if the LAN Settings have
not been defined.

IP

Network setting

Space for typing in a new IP address, for


the Main Computer or the DHCP server.
See Configure for fixed IP network and
Configure for DHCP distributed IP network
below.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Parameter

Configure for
fixed IP network

Type

Description

(Subnet mask) Network setting

Shows the subnet mask of the network.


Only visible when configured for fixed IP.

(Gateway)

Shows the gateway IP for the network.


Only visible when configured for fixed IP.

Network setting

1. Press FIX IP.


2. Fill in the assigned IP address for the Main Computer, and the Subnet
Mask and Gateway for the Network and press OK.
You will be asked to reboot the system.

3. Press YES to make the new setting take effect.

Configure for
DHCP distributed
IP network

1. Press DHCP.
1. The value for IP will change to DHCP.
2. Press OK.
You will be asked to reboot the system.

3. Press YES to make the new setting take effect.

3HAC 16638-1

191

Controller
Robot controller

Service Settings Window

When is it
shown?

The Service Settings window will be displayed when Service Settings is pressed
in the Network Settings window as shown in the figure in section "Network Settings".

en0100000257

OK

returns to the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

Service Setting
Parameter

Description

IP (service setting) The IP Address for the I/O Computer

192

IP

Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer.

Subnet mask

Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer.

Gateway

Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

System selection window

When is it
shown?

The Select System window will be displayed when Select System is pressed in the
Start window, as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

xx0100000171

CANCEL

How to select
system

returns to the Start window as shown in the figure in section


"Start Window".

The window shows all systems installed on the controller mass storage memory.

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Select by moving the X to a


desired system and press OK.
The system will reboot with the
new system and then display the
Welcome window as shown in
the figure.

xx0100000172

3HAC 16638-1

193

Controller
Robot controller

How to perform a Restart

General

Performing a restart may be done in a number of ways. These are detailed below:

Reboot (Warm
start), apply
changed settings

When executing a Warm start, the system reboots with the current system, e.g. to
make new or changed settings take effect.

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Press the button Miscellaneous and select


Service window or System Parameter window

Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2.

P-START, reinstallation of RAPID

Select Restart from the File menu and press


OK.
The system reboots and returns to the Welcome window as shown in the second figure
in section "Select System".

A P-Start will warm start the current system, with a reinstallation of the RAPID
language and all auto-loaded modules. This means that all RAPID program and
system modules currently loaded in the working memory will be closed, and thus
have to be reloaded again after the P-Start, with the exception of such modules that
are automatically loaded, due to settings in the System Parameters/Controller/
Task Modules.

Step

Action

Illustration/info

1.

Press the button Miscellaneous and select


Service window.

Miscellaneous button:

2.

Select Restart from the File menu.

xx0100000194

194

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Step

X-START, change
active controller
system

Action

Illustration/info

3.

Enter the numbers: 2_5_8 (the fifth function


key changes to P-START)

4.

Press P-START.
The system will reboot, reinstall RAPID and
its auto-loaded modules, and return to the
Welcome window as shown in the second figure in section "Select System".

An X-start will exit the running system, store system data on the mass storage
memory, and then execute the BootImage to display the Start window. Any system
stored in the mass storage memory may then be selected as described in section
"Select System".
When performing an X-Start all stored system data will be restored (similar to
performing a warm start).

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Press the button Miscellaneous and select


Service window.

Miscellaneous button:

2.

Select Restart from the File menu.

3.

Enter the numbers: 1_5_9 (the fifth function


key changes to X-START)

4.

Press X-START.
The system will reboot and return to the Start
window as shown in the figure in section
"Start Window".

xx0100000194

I-START, start in
Query mode

3HAC 16638-1

An I-start can be done if "Use Query Mode at System Boot" was selected when
creating the running system in RobInstall (see section "Change options or system
pack revision"). An I-Start will restart the current system and give the opportunity

195

Controller
Robot controller

to set some values at start-up, e.g. language, IRB type (within the same model) or
options (see section "Start in Query Mode").

Step

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Press the button Miscellaneous and selectService window.

Miscellaneous button:

2.

Select Restart from the File menu.

3.

Enter the numbers: 1_4_7 (the fifth function


key changes to I-START).

4.

Press I-START.
The system will start to reboot, then pause to
ask for Silent, Easy, or Query mode. For more
information on the different modes, continue
to section "Start in Query Mode".

xx0100000194

C-START (Cold
start), delete the
active system

When executing a C-Start, the system exits the running system and deletes it from
the mass storage memory. The BootImage is then executed and the Start window
as shown in the figure in section "Start Window" is displayed.
Use C-start with caution. Since it deletes the current system, it should not be used
to just switch between installed systems. For this purpose, use X-Start (see section
"X-start").
It will take quite some time to implement a Cold start. Just wait until the robot shows
the Start window. When the Start window is shown, a new system can be selected
if available in the mass storage memory (see section "Select System) or a new
system can be downloaded and started (see section "Transfer Robot Controller
System using Ethernet connection" or "Transfer Robot Controller System using
floppy disks").
Do not touch any key, joystick, enable device, or emergency stop during the cold
start until the Start window is shown as in the figure in section "Start Window".

196

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Step
1.

Action

Illustration/Info

Press the button Miscellaneous and selectService window.

Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

3HAC 16638-1

2.

Select Restart from the File menu.

3.

Enter the numbers: 1_3_4_6_7_9 (the fifth


function key changes to C-START)

4.

Press C-START.

197

Controller
Robot controller

How to Start in Query Mode

Pre-conditions
for selecting
Query Mode start

If "Use Query Mode at System Boot" was selected when creating the system in
RobInstall (see section "Change options or system pack revision"), it is possible
to set some values, e.g. language, IRB type (within the same model) or options, at
the first start-up of the system, using a C-Start (see section "C-start"), or later on
when performing an I-Start (see section "I-start").

Types of Query
Mode

The first question from the system is which Query Mode to start. Depending on
your needs, you should select one of the following three:

Easy Query Mode

Silent Mode, pushbutton Silent. If Silent Mode is selected, the operating


system will be installed with the system configured as defined in RobInstall.

Easy Query Mode, pushbutton Easy Query. In Easy Query Mode you can
change language, remove selected options and select service or standard
mode (see section "Easy Query Mode").

Query Mode, pushbutton Query. In Query Mode you can, as well as the
things in Easy Query, select DC-link, change Robot type (within the same
family) and for IRB 7600, select balancing unit (see section "Query
Mode").

If Easy Query was chosen as start-up query mode, the following steps will be
required to start the system:

Step

198

Action

Illustration/Info

1.

Select Service/Standard motion param.


Choose between standard or service motion
parameters (pushbutton Stand / pushbutton
Service).

2.

Choose TP Language. If there was another


language than English selected in RobInstall
(see section "Change options or system pack
revision"), it will be possible to choose the
language (pushbutton English /pushbutton
"Other").

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
Robot controller

Step
3.

Query Mode

Action

Illustration/Info

Install xxx? For every option that was


selected in RobInstall (see section "Change
options or system pack revision") it is now
possible to select Yes to keep the option, or
No to remove it from the system.

If Query Mode was chosen as start-up query mode, the following steps will be
required to start the system:

Step

Action

Illustration/info

1.

Select Service/Standard motion param. See


section "Easy Query Mode", step 1.

2.

Choose TP Language. See section "Easy


Query Mode", step 2.

3.

Select external axes config.


You can find the article number of the DC-link
used on the unit inside the controller, then
use the table below to find out the configuration ID for that DC-link.

3HAC 16638-1

4.

Select xxxx model. Choose Robot model type


within in the same family, e.g. 1400, 6400 etc.
If there are more than three options, press
pushbutton SCAN to view them.

5.

Install xxx. See section "Easy Query Mode",


step 3.

199

Controller
System directory structure

Section G: System directory structure


Media pool in the PC

Directory

All RobotWare System Packages and Option Packages are stored in a media pool
directory (folder) as shown in the table below.
Two revisions of the same system package may exist in the pool. By default, after
having installed RobInstall, a directory "MediaPool" will be found in the directory
Program Files\ABB Robotics\, and will also be the current one. However any
directory in the structure can be set up as the current media pool in the Preference
window (see section "Robinstall Preferences").

xx0100000259

Naming conventions

200

Art. no./folder name

Description

3HAXaaaa-1.00

RobotWare System Pack 3HAXaaaa-1, rev 00

3HAXbbbb-1.02

RobotWare System Pack 3HAXbbbb-1, rev 02

3HAXcccc-1.01

ABB Robotics external option program 3HAXcccc-1,


rev 01

3HYZdddd-1.00

OEM customer external option program 3XYZdddd-1,


rev 00

Each package is stored in a directory, the name of which is an article number


ending with the sub-number and with the revision number as shown in the table
above. All the system packs and option packs in one media pool must have the
correct revision numbers in their directory names. Thus a later revision can be
loaded into the program pool, to be added to the old one, without changing the
article number.

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
System directory structure

System pool in the PC

Directory

All systems created with the RobInstall will be stored in a system pool. The
default name of such a system pool is "system" as shown below. Each system
stored in the system pool is a directory with the name of the system as shown in
the table below.
By default, after installing RobInstall, a directory "system" will be found in Program Files\ABB Robotics\ and will also be the current one. However any directory in the structure can be set up as the current system directory in the Create New
System window or Select System window.

Directory view

Folder "System 1"

xx0100000260

xx0100000261

File system
requirements

3HAC 16638-1

The system directory must hold these files and directories to allow software installation:

key.id (encrypted key file for the actual controller)

program.id (file with paths to selected programs in the media pool)

A syspar directory containing .cfg files to be included in the software installation procedure. All system parameter files, included when creating a system with RobInstall, are stored in this syspar directory as shown in the
table in section "System Pool Directory".

A directory called Home. In this home directory the user can include any
file or files, which should be downloaded to the controller together with the
operating system. Such files will then be placed in the home directory of
the system in the controller.

201

Controller
System directory structure

File structure in the robot controller mass storage memory

Files in root directory, hd0a

The root directory of the mass storage memory is called hd0a. This includes several components:

File name

Description

E.g. 3HAC6811-1.00 Control system package, named as an article number


bin

BootImage code

BootRom.sys

System configuration and description file for the mass


storage memory

MC.cfg

Network configuration for the main computer

ctrl.bin

Holds e.g. revolution counter values

system.dir

Holds information on the current system

system directories

Different systems stored in the mass storage memory

Directories and
subdirectories

Each system directory holds a number of subdirectories, defining for instance language, options, robots, etc.

"Home" directory

The system directory is the "home" directory for the system. When using the
address "home:" in the RAPID program, this directory will be addressed.

"Bin" subdirectory

The subdirectory bin, containing the storage area for all system data, e.g. at power
break. This means that at warm start, in addition to restoring the operating system
from the control system package, all system data is restored from this directory
and reloaded into the working memory.

Never change
these directories!

Never delete or change the \bin or BootRom.sys directories in the root directory.
If this is done, the controller cannot be restarted and it will be impossible to use
the mass storage memory.

202

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
System directory structure

Preparation of S4Cplus software to be installed

Illustration
Media pool
S ystem Pack in
/3haxbbbb-1.nn
*.* si gnature no

S ystem pool

E xt Option in
/3haxcccc1.nn
*.* relkey.txt

Created files
key.id
program.id

E xternal option from


disk or CD-R OM

S ystem Pack from


R obotWare CD-R OM

My syst em
/syst em_n
key.id
program.id
keystr.txt
/syspar
*.cfg

Inserted key strings


are saved in keystr.txt
R obotWare keystrings define the options
to be included from the S ystem Pack
they belong to and E xt opt keystrings define
added external option packages.
All keys must have the same serial number.

xx0100000262

Files to be prepared

3HAC 16638-1

The list details what happens during preparation:

RobInstall creates a file named Key.id from the key strings specifying the
options to be installed from the System Pack and the external option programs to be installed.

Unless deselected in RobInstall, the latest revision of the System Pack and
External Option Programs is selected as default (see section "Change
options or system pack revisions").

These are copied from the media pool and concatenated into one target
file that also holds the key.id and the syspar directory. This may then be
downloaded to the controller via Ethernet or a set of diskettes. The target
file is temporarily stored in the system directory before downloading or creating diskettes.

203

Controller
System directory structure

Handling mass memory storage capacity

General

In some cases it is very important that there is enough free space in the mass
storage memory, before attempting to download new system software. How to
check its capacity, and if required increase it, is detailed below.
A manual check on the free space can be done in one of the following ways:

Checking storage
capacity from the
Teach Pendant
Unit

Checking storage
capacity through
connection to the
MC/CONSOLE
port

1. Press the button Miscellaneous to select Service window.


2. Select Storage Capacity from the System Info menu. The Mass
Storage Memory is called hd0a.

1. Connect a console to the MC/CONSOLE outlet on the controller and


execute the command dosFsShow.

There should always be at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass
storage memory before attempting to download a new system. For information on
how to increase storage capacity, see below!

Increasing storage capacity

If the capacity of the mass storage memory is less than 25 Mb when a new controller system is to be downloaded, storage memory must be released by removing
old systems from the mass storage memory. This can be done in one of the following ways:
1. Boot up on the system you would like to remove and then make a CSTART (see section "C-start").
2. Use the FileManager in the Teach Pendant Unit, see Users Guide - File
Manager, for more information on how to use the FileManager.
3. Use a third-party "ftp" client (like FTPVoyager supplied on the RobotWare CD).

204

3HAC 16638-1

Controller
System directory structure

Removing systems using the FileManager or FTP-client may be hazardous since


the \bin and BootRom.sys directories must be kept intact.
Proceed with the utmost care to avoid accidentally removing such files or directories!

3HAC 16638-1

205

Controller
System directory structure

206

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration

Chapter 5:Calibration
When to calibrate

Types of calibration procedures

Calibrate the measurement system carefully if any of the resolver values has been
changed. This may occur when parts affecting the calibration position have been
replaced on the robot.
Calibrate the system roughly as detailed in section "Updating the revolution
counter" if the contents of the revolution counter memory are lost. This may occur
when:

3HAC 16638-1

the battery is discharged

a resolver error occurs

the signal between a resolver and measurement board is interrupted

a robot axis has been moved with the control system disconnected

207

Calibration
General

Section A: General
How to calibrate the robot system

General

This section provides an overview of the procedure required when calibrating the
robot system. Many of the steps in the procedure are detailed in other sections to
which references are given.

Procedure
Step

208

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check that all required hardware is


available for calibrating the robot.

Required hardware is specified


in the calibrating procedures for
each axis.

2.

Check the correct orientation of axis 4. Detailed in "Correct orientation


Incorrect orientation of the axis may
of axes".
cause damage on cabling!

3.

Manually, run the robot axes to a posi- Use the calibration scales or distion close to the correct calibration
tances to locate this position,
position.
detailed in "Correct orientation
of axes".

4.

Start the calibration procedure on the


TPU.

Detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU".

5.

Calibrate each axis.

Detailed in "Fine calibration, all


axes".

6.

Verify that the calibration was successfully carried out.

Detailed in "Post calibration procedure".

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
General

Additional
information

In addition to the basic calibration procedure detailed above, a number of calibration related actions may be performed:

Action

Detailed in section:

How to update the robot revolution counter


without performing a complete calibration.

Updating the revolution counter

How to manually check the current calibration Checking the calibration position
position.

3HAC 16638-1

209

Calibration
General

Calibration tool kit, contents

Calibration tool
kit, 3HAC xxxxx-x

The calibration tool kit, 3HAC xxxxx-x, can be ordered from ABB Automation
Technologies AB, Robotics.
The kit contains:

210

Digital indicator

Magnetic stand

Calibration tool for actuator

Calibration tool for wrist

Tool case

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Section B: Preliminaries
Correct orientation of axes

General

This section details the correct orientation of all axes.


The orientation of axis 4 must be especially checked and corrected if necessary
before performing any calibration!

3HAC 16638-1

211

Calibration
Preliminaries

Index marks

The figure below shows the index marks of axes 4-5-6 and the correct position of
the spiral cable. It also shows the calibration distance on axes 1-2-3.

C
B
G
D

xx0200000341

212

Axis 4 (center tube)

Index marks for axis 5

Spiral cable inspection cover

Index marks for axis 6

Correct orientation of the spiral


cable (and axis 4)

Calibration distance for axes 12-3: 26 mm on each axis

Index marks for axis 4

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Correct position
of axes 1-2-3

The axes 1-2-3 should be positioned with an approximate distance of 26 mm


between the actuator and the calibration spacer above the lower joint, shown in
figure above. This distance is set exactly during the fine calibration procedure.

Correct orientation of axis 4

The procedure below details how to check and eventually correct the orientation
of axis 4.
Axis 4 has no mechanical limitation! Cabling inside the manipulator may be damaged if axis 4 is oriented incorrectly when performing calibration of the robot!

If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points
must be observed:
The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position
to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link
or remote control panel.
The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector
is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the
working space. The position 100%full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.

Step Action

Note

1. Remove the spiral cable inspection cover on Shown in figure above!


the center tube sleeve by removing its 4
attachment screws.
2. Make a visual check of the numbers, marked Directions detailed in part
on the spiral cable.
Directions for all axes.
The numbers 4-3-2-1 must be positioned in a
straight line, as shown in figure above!
In case the index marks are not present:
make sure that the normal vector of the face
of the gearbox, axis 5, is pointing in approximate (+ / - a couple of degrees) +Y direction!
3. In case correction is necessary, turn axis 4
with the TPU into the approximate calibration
position by positioning the numbers into a
straight line!

3HAC 16638-1

213

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step Action

Note

4. Refit the spiral cable inspection cover with the


4 attachment screws!

Correct orientation of axes 5-6

The procedure below details the correct orientation of axes 5-6.

Step

214

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Make sure that the index marks of axis 5 are


roughly aligned.
In case the index marks are not present:
make sure that the normal vector of the face
of the tool flange is pointing approximately (+
/ - a couple of degrees) in the +Z direction
(positive)!

Location shown in figure


above!
Directions detailed in part
Directions for all axes.

2.

Make sure that the index marks of axis 6 are


roughly aligned.
In case the index marks are not present:
make sure that the hole for the guide pin in
the tool flange is pointing approximately (+ / a couple of degrees) in the -X direction (negative)!

Location shown in figure


above!
Directions detailed in part
Directions for all axes.

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Checking the calibration position

General

Using the Jogging window on


the teach pendant

Check the calibration position before beginning any programming of the robot
system. This may be done as detailed below.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Open the Jogging window.

xx0100000195

2.

Choose running axis-by-axis.

3.

Check that the positions of axes 1-2-3 are


reached and that the calibration marks on
axes 4-5-6 are aligned correctly.
If they are not, update the revolution counters
as detailed in "Update the revolution
counter".

xx0100000196

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration positions and


marks for each axis are
shown in section "Correct
orientation of axes".

215

Calibration
Preliminaries

Updating the revolution counter

Manually running
the manipulator
to the sync position

This section details the first step when updating the revolution counter; manually
running the manipulator to the synchronization position.

Axis 4 has no mechanical limitation! Cabling inside manipulator may be damaged


if axis 4 is oriented incorrectly when performing calibration of the robot!
the

Step

Storing the revolution counter


setting

Action

Illustration

1.

Select axis-by-axis motion mode

2.

Press the enabling device on the teach pen- Calibration marks shown
dant and, using the joystick, move the robot in section "Correct orienmanually so that the calibration marks or dis- tation of axes".
tances lie within the tolerance zone.

3.

Note that axis 6 does not have any mechanical stop and can thus be calibrated at the
wrong faceplate revolution. Do not operate
axis 6 manually before the robot has been
calibrated.

4.

When all axes have been positioned as


above, store the revolution counter settings
using the Teach Pendant Unit as detailed
below:

This section details the second step when updating the revolution counter; storing
the revolution counter settings.

If a revolution counter is incorrectly updated, it will cause incorrect robot positioning, which in turn may cause damage or injury!

216

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
1.

Action

Illustration

Press the button "Miscellaneous".

xx0100000194

2.

Select the Service window


by pressing ENTER.

xx0100000200

3.

Select Calibration from


the View menu.
The Calibration window
appears.

xx0100000201

4.

Select the desired unit and


choose Rev Counter
Update from the Calib
menu.
The Revolution Counter
Update window appears.

xx0100000202

5.

3HAC 16638-1

Select the desired axis and


press Incl to include it (it
will be marked with an x) or
press All to select all axes.

217

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step

218

Action

Illustration

6.

Press OK when all axes that


are to be updated are
marked with an x.
CANCEL returns to the Calibration window.

7.

Press OK again to confirm


and start the update.
CANCEL returns to the Revolution Counter Update window.

8.

At this point, it is recommended that the revolution


counter values are saved to
a diskette.

9.

Recheck the calibration position as described in "Checking the calibration position".

Not required.

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Fine calibration procedure on TPU

General

The section below details how to use the Teach Pendant Unit (TPU) when performing a fine-calibration of the robot.

Procedure
Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Press the button "Miscellaneous".

2.

Select the Service window


by pressing ENTER.

xx0100000194

xx0100000200

3HAC 16638-1

219

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Choose Calibration
from the View menu. The
Calibration window appears.

xx0100000201

Explanation of status:
Synchronized: all axes are calibrated and their positions are
known. The unit is ready for use.

4.

Revolution Counter not updated:


all axes are fine-calibrated but one
(or more) of the axes has a
counter that is NOT updated. This
axis, or these axes, must therefore
be updated as described in
"Updating the revolution counter".

Not calibrated: one (or more) of


the axis is NOT fine-calibrated.
This axis, or these axes, must
therefore be fine-calibrated as
described in "Fine calibration".

Select the desired unit and


choose Fine Calibrate
from the Calib menu. A
Warning window appears.

xx0100000203

220

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
5.

Action

Note/Illustration

Move the manipulator to its


calibration position and
press OK. The Fine Calibrate window appears.

Calibration positions for the manipulator


detailed in "Checking the calibration position".

xx0100000204

3HAC 16638-1

6.

Select the desired axis and


press Incl to include it (it
will be marked with an x) or
press All to select all axes.

7.

Press OK when all axes that


are to be updated are
marked with an x.
CANCEL returns to the Calibration window.

8.

Press OK again to confirm


and start the update.
CANCEL returns to the Fine
Calibration window.
An alert box is displayed during calibration. The Status
window appears when the
fine calibration is complete.
The revolution counters are
always updated at the same
time as the calibration is performed.

221

Calibration
Calibration

Section C: Calibration
Directions for all axes

Calibration movement directions

The figure below shows the positive and negative directions for each axis.

+
4

+
+

xx0200000355

222

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Calibration

Jogging
directions

The figure below shows the linear directions when jogging the robot.

+Y

+Z

+X

+Z

xx0200000378

3HAC 16638-1

223

Calibration
Calibration

Fine calibration, all axes

Introduction

This section details how to calibrate the complete robot, using calibration tools.
The section is divided into the following parts:

Before calibration

Before calibration

Required equipment

Calibration order

Calibration, axes 1, 2 and 3

Calibration, axis 5

Calibration, axis 6

Calibration, axis 4

Before calibrating the robot, make sure that the requirements in the previous sections "General" and "Preliminaries" are met!

Required equipment

Calibration order

224

Equipment, etc.

Art. no.

Note

Calibration tool kit

Contains tools for calibration of complete


robot. May be ordered from ABB Automation Technologies AB, Robotics.

The order of calibration of the axes 1, 2 and 3 is of no importance, but the remaining axes must be calibrated in the following sequence: 5 - 6 - 4.

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration axis 1,
2 and 3

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 1, but it is the same for axes 2
and 3. Calibrate one axis at a time and then repeat the procedure for the remaining
axes.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Turn the operating mode selector to MANUAL MODE AT REDUCED SPEED.

2.

Operate current axis (axis 1, 2 or 3) in manual mode with the joystick until only 40-50
mm of the movable part of the actuator is
visible.

3.

Insert the gauge block between the platform and the actuator cover (see adjacent
figure) and then gently contract the actuator until the gauge block fits exactly but is
not jammed.
Note! All three actuators should have
approximately the same length when one
of them is calibrated.

xx0200000351

3HAC 16638-1

4.

Update only the current axis (axis 1, 2 or 3)


as detailed in "Fine calibration procedure
on TPU".

5.

Remove the calibration tools.

A: 26 mm

225

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration, axis 5

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 5.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Put a dial gauge (mounted on a support positioned on a flat surface


external to the robot) against the
edge of the tool flange as shown in
the adjacent figure.
The purpose of this procedure is to
adjust axis 5 so that it is possible to
rotate axis 4 without reading any offset on the indicator.

xx0200000352

226

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Calibration

Step
2.

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Note/Illustration

Lock all other axes when jogging


axis 4.
Rotate axis 4 in joint +180
degrees.

Rotate axis 5 to compensate


for half the value read on the
indicator (i.e. the indicator
shows 0.58 mm, move axis 5
gently until the indicator
shows 0.29).

Rotate axis 4 -180 degrees


(=back to the starting position, 0 degrees).

Repeat until it is possible to


rotate axis 4 180 degrees
without reading any error on
the gauge. Normally, it
requires 2-4 attempts.

3.

Update only axis 5, as detailed in


"Fine calibration procedure on TPU".

4.

Remove the calibration tools.

227

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration axis 6

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 6.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the following axis to the specified


position:
Axis 5: -90 degrees.

2.

Fit the wrist calibration tool at the tool


flange and put a dial gauge (mounted
on as support positioned on a flat surface external to the robot) against the
edge of the tool, see the adjacent figure.

xx0200000353

3.

228

Lock all other linear directions except Directions shown in Directions


for Z.
for all axes.

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
Calibration

Step

Calibration, axis 4

Action

Note/Illustration

4.

Move the robot in +/-Z (in base) and Directions shown in Directions
adjust axis 6 until the indicator shows for all axes.
minimum change (usually a few hundredths of a millimeter) while travelling from the middle of the tool to one
end (i.e. if the indicator shows 0.46
mm while travelling from the center of
the tool to one end of the tool, rotate
axis 6 by 0.46 mm).

5.

Update only axis 6, as detailed in


"Fine calibration procedure on TPU".

6.

Remove the calibration tools.

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 4.

Step
1.

2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Run the following axes to


the specified positions:
Axis 5: -90 degrees.

Axis 6: +90 degrees.

Axis 4: 0 degrees.

Put a dial gauge (mounted


on a support positioned on a
flat surface external to the
robot) against the ground
face of the tool, see the adjacent figure.

xx0200000354

3HAC 16638-1

229

Calibration
Calibration

Step

230

Action

Note/Illustration

3.

Lock all other linear directions except for Y.

Directions shown in Directions for all


axes.

4.

Move the robot in +/-Y (in


Directions shown in Directions for all
base) and adjust axis 4 until axes.
the indicator shows minimum change (usually a few
hundredths of a millimeter)
while travelling from the middle of the tool to one end (i.e.
if the indicator shows 0.52
mm while travelling from the
center of the tool to one end
of the tool, rotate axis 4 by
0.52 mm).

5.

Update only axis 4, as


detailed in "Fine calibration
procedure on TPU".

6.

Remove the calibration


tools.

3HAC 16638-1

Calibration
After calibration

Section D: After calibration


Post calibration procedure

General

Perform the following procedure after calibrating any manipulator axes. The procedure is intended to verify that all calibration positions are correct.

Procedure
Step

3HAC 16638-1

Action

Illustration

1.

Run the calibration home position program


Detailed in "Checking the
twice.
calibration position".
Do not change the position of the manipulator
axes after running the program!

2.

Check all calibration positions.

3.

Repeat the check as above.

4.

Adjust the calibration marks when the calibra- Shown in section "Cortion is done.
rect orientation of axes".

5.

The system parameters will be saved to the


storage memory at power off.

6.

Remove any calibration equipment from the


manipulator.

Detailed in "Checking the


calibration position".

231

Calibration
After calibration

232

3HAC 16638-1

Index

3HAC 16638-1

233

Index

234

3HAC 16638-1

Repair Manual
Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept
3HAC 16640-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept



ABB Automation Technology Products AB


Robotics
S-721 68 VSTERS
SWEDEN
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000
Telefax:
+46 (0) 21 132592

Repair Manual, IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16640-1
-

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and


should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages
arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without
ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to
a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention
will be prosecuted.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then
current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved.


ABB Automation Technology Products AB
Robotics
SE-721 68 Vsters
Sweden

Table of Contents

Overview
Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept
Chapter 1: Safety, service
Introduction
Safety, service - General
Section A: References

Limitation of Liability
Applicable Safety Standards
Related information
Section B: Safety risks

Safety risks related to end effector


Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

Safety fence dimensions


Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulator's arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit
Work inside the manipulators working range
Chapter 2: Reference Information
Introduction
Screw joints
Weight specifications
Chapter 3: Manipulator
Introduction
Section A: Manipulator repairs

Removal of actuator, including motor


Refitting of actuator, including motor
Removal of servomotor, axes 1-3
Refitting of servomotor, axes 1-3
Removal of servomotor, axis 4

3HAC 16640-1

1
3
5
5
6
7

7
7
8
9

9
9
9
10
10
11
13

13
13
14
14
15
15
15
17
17
18
20
21
21
22

22
27
34
38
43

Table of Contents

Refitting of servomotor, axis 4


Removal of lower joint
Refitting of lower joint
Removal of wrist
Refitting of wrist
Removal of center unit
Refitting of center unit
Removal of spiral cable
Refitting of spiral cable

49
55
58
62
67
72
77
82
85

Section B: Distribution box repairs

89

Replacement of battery, distribution box


Replacement of serial measurement card, distribution box
Replacement of brake release card, distribution box
Chapter 4: Controller
Introduction
Putting the computer unit in the service position
Replacement of air filter, controller
Replacement of battery unit, controller
Replacement of I/O and gateway units
Replacement of bleeder resistor
Replacement of mass storage memory
Replacement of internal cooling fan
Replacement of drive units and rectifier
Replacement of system fan unit
Replacement of power supply unit
Chapter 5: Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept
Introduction
=M1/2, Potentials from control
=M1/3, Axis 1
=M1/4, Axis 2
=M1/5, Axis 3
=M1/6, Axis 4
=M1/7, Axis 5
=M1/8, Axis 6
=M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connections
=M/10, Brake release unit

ii

89
92
95
99
99
100
103
106
109
113
116
120
125
129
132
135
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
144

3HAC 16640-1

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus


Introduction
System 1: General information

Sheet 1-1. Block Diagram


Sheet 1-2. View of Control Cabinet
Sheet 1-3. View of Control Cabinet
Sheet 1-4. Designation
Sheet 1-5. Designation
System 2: Mains Connection and Power Supply

Sheet 2-1. Mains Connection


Sheet 2-2. Transformer Unit
Sheet 2-3. Power Supply
Sheet 2-4. Power Supply
Sheet 2-5. External transformer unit 200-500V IRB6600/7600
Sheet 2-6. Transformer unit 400-475V IRB 6600/7600
System 3: Computer Unit and Connector Unit

Sheet 3-1. Block Diagram/Computer Unit


Sheet 3-2. Cabling in Computer Unit
Sheet 3-3. Main Computer and Hard Disk / Flash Disk Drive
Sheet 3-4. Compute Cooling
Sheet 3-5. Base Connector Board and I/O Computer
Sheet 3-6. Connector Board and I/O Computer
Sheet 3-7. Connector Board and Axis Computer
Sheet 3-8. Base Connector Unit
Sheet 3-9. Connector Plate on Controller Panel
System 4: Emergency Stops and Run Chain

Sheet 4-1. Emergency Stop


Sheet 4-2. Run Chain
Sheet 4-3. Run Chain
Sheet 4-4. Power Unit Servo Disconnector
System 5: Drive System and Robot Cable

Sheet 5-1. Block Diagram


Sheet 5-2. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder
Sheet 5-3. Drive System Signal Connection 2 Drive Units
Sheet 5-4. Drive System Signal Connection 3 Drive Units
Sheet 5-5. Servo Drive Units / IRB 140
Sheet 5-6. Servo Drive Units / IRB 340
Sheet 5-7. Servo Drive Units / IRB 640, 840
Sheet 5-8. Servo Drive Units / IRB 1400, 2400

3HAC 16640-1

145
145
146

146
147
148
149
150
151

151
152
153
154
155
156
157

157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166

166
167
168
169
170

170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177

iii

Table of Contents

Sheet 5-9. Servo Drive Units / IRB 4400, 6400S/PE


Sheet 5-10. Servo Drive Units / IRB 6400R
Sheet 5-11. Control Cable IRB 140
Sheet 5-12. Control Cable IRB 340, 1400 and 2400
Sheet 5-13. Control Cable IRB 640, 840, 4400 and 6400S/PE
Sheet 5-14. Control Cable IRB 6400R
Sheet 5-15. Rectifier, fans and bleeder
Sheet 5-16. Servo Drive System
Sheet 5-17. Control cable
System 6: External axes

Sheet 6-1. External axes


Sheet 6-2. Axes Computer 2 and Connector Board
Sheet 6-3. Expansion Board Axis Connector Board
Sheet 6-4. Drive System Signal Connection External Axes
Sheet 6-5. External axes no. 7th - 9th Control Signal Connection
Sheet 6-6. Axis Computer 2 and Axis Connector Unit if External Axis Cabinet
Sheet 6-7. Connection to External Axis Cabinet
Sheet 6-8. Servogun-SMB power/signals cable
System 7: I/O Units and Field Bus Modules

Sheet 7-1. I/O Unit Position


Sheet 7-2. Digital Part of Combi I/O and Digital I/O Unit Input Part
Sheet 7-3. Digital I/O Unit Output Part
Sheet 7-4. Combi I/O Unit Digital and Analogue Output Part
Sheet 7-5. Digital Input Part of 120V AC I/O Unit
Sheet 7-6. Digital Output Part of 120V AC I/O Unit
Sheet 7-7. Relay I/O Unit Input 1-16
Sheet 7-8. Digital with Relays I/O Output 1-8
Sheet 7-9. Digital with Relays I/O Output 9-16
Sheet 7-10. Analogue I/O Unit
Sheet 7-11. Remote I/O Unit For Allen Bradley PLC
Sheet 7-12. Interbus-S Master/Slave - Interbus-S Master
Sheet 7-13. Profibus DP SLave
Sheet 7-14. Encoder Unit
Sheet 7-15. Profibus DP Master/Slave
Sheet 7-16. Interbus master/slave optical fibre and copper wire
System 8: Other options

Sheet 8-1. Floppy Disk


Sheet 8-2. Service Equipment Supply
Sheet 8-3. External Connections System Signals
Sheet 8-4. Position Switches on Manipulator

iv

178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187

187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195

195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211

211
212
213
214

3HAC 16640-1

Table of Contents

Sheet 8-5. Customer Signals


Sheet 8-6. Sustomer Power/SIgnal IRB 2400, 4400, 6400S/PE
Sheet 8-7. Customer Cable Power/Signal/CAN IRB 6400R
Sheet 8-8. External Control Panel
Sheet 8-9. Extension Cable Teach Pendant
Sheet 8-10. Time Relay
Sheet 8-11. Customer Precess / Power / Signal / Profibus DP M/S
Sheet 8-12. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R
Sheet 8-13. LAN Ethernet connection
Sheet 8-14. Customer power/CAN-BUS IRB 640/6400S
Sheet 8-15. Customer cable power/signal CAN-BUS IRB 6600/7600
Sheet 8-16. Customer cable power/signal Profibus IRB 6600/7600
Sheet 8-17. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R
System 9: External Axis Cabinet

Sheet 9-1. Block Diagram


Sheet 9-2. View of External Axis Cabinet
Sheet 9-3. Designation
Sheet 9-4. Mains Connection
Sheet 9-5. Transformer Unit
Sheet 9-6. Power Supply, I/O Supply
Sheet 9-7. Power Unit
Sheet 9-8. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder
Sheet 9-9. Drive Unit Signal Connection 1 External Drive Unit
Sheet 9-10. Drive Unit Signal Connection 2 External Drive Units
Sheet 9-11. Drive Unit Signal Connection 3 External Drive Units
Sheet 9-12. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT
Sheet 9-13. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT+CCB
Sheet 9-14. Drive Unit and Control Cable
Sheet 9-15. Service Equipment Supply

3HAC 16640-1

215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228

228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242

Table of Contents

vi

3HAC 16640-1

Overview

About This
Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for repairing the


complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during repair work.

Who Should Read


This Manual?

This manual is intended for:

Prerequisites

Organization of
Chapters

repair personnel in the users organization.

repair personnel in other organizations.

The reader should...

be a trained repair craftsman

have the required knowledge of mechanical repair work OR

have the required knowledge of electrical repair work.

The manual is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter

Contents

1.

Safety

2.

Reference information

3.

Manipulator

4.

Controller

References

3HAC 16640-1

Reference

Document Id

Circuit diagrams, Manipulator

Included in Repair Manual,


3HAC 16640-1

Reference

Document Id

Circuit diagrams, Controller

Included in Repair Manual,


3HAC 16640-1

Revisions

Revision

Description

First edition

3HAC 16640-1

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists


of several manuals listed below:

Overview,
Installation and
Commissioning
Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:

Overview, Repair
Manual

Overview,
Maintenance
Manual

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Unpacking

On-site Installation

Electrical connections

Start-up

Robot controller

Installation of controller software

System directory structure

Calibration

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare


parts

Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered


spare parts

Circuit Diagram for manipulator

Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Maintenance schedules

Maintenance activities

Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter "Safety, service" is divided into the following sections:


A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability
applicable safety standards
referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system.
The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector
Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid


dangers.
Safety fence dimensions
Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulators arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device
Work inside the manipulators working range

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and
responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete
system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety
of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed
and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards
and regulations of the country where the robot is installed.
The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable
safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the
safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have
been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be
familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the
applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of
external safety
devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external
safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This
means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral
equipment as well as from the robot.
In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service
References

Section A: References
Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be
construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause
injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

3HAC 16640-1

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:

EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology

EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop

EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment

EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces

EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles

EN 775, Robot safety

EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines

EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment


(EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure)
(EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains)

EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments


(EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test)
(EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields)
(EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
immunity test)

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents

Type of information

Detailed in document

Installation of safety devices

Installation and Commissioning Manual

Changing robot modes

Users Guide

Section

Start-up

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks


Safety risks related to end effector
Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure
that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating.
It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the


event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Residual energy

Safe design

3HAC 16640-1

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken.

The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before


starting to repair them.

Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop.

Dump valves should be used in case of emergency.

Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

Qualified
personnel

Extraordinary
risks

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different
industrial applications.

All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the
applicable safety regulations.

Care must be taken at all times.

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are
familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated
with its different parts.

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other
than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be
rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation


and service

Nation/region
specific regulations

10

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning


must always be followed.

Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so


that the robot can be stopped quickly.

Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are
available for the installation in question.

Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot
system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the
robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage
related risks

To be observed
by the supplier of
the complete system

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up


in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are
suitable devices.

Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the
robot's working space.

The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released
or when the motors or other components are removed.

When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling


objects.

Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller.

Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or
other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because
of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the
robot.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related
risks, general

3HAC 16640-1

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while


the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the
mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads
and disconnecting or connecting units.

The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can
be turned off outside the robots working space.

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related
risks, controller,
S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:

Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller.

Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power
from an external source.

The mains supply/mains switch

The power unit

The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC)

The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!)

The drive unit (700 VDC)

The service outlets (115/230 VAC)

The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the
machining process

The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even
when the robot is disconnected from the mains.

Additional connections

Voltage related
risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:

Voltage related
risks, tools, material handling
devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in
the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working
process may be damaged.

12

The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC)

The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC)

The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V
AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions


Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the
fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:

- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy
associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and
ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any
projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made from
suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces
involved and appropriate materials.

- insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically


the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process
down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values.
Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation.

- isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray
mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes
involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot
(manipulator or controller)!

3HAC 16640-1

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the
brakes" in the Installation Manual.
The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been
released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not
increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may
be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed
below:
1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of
the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load).
2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating
mode selector on the controller.
3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then
the brake function is adequate.

14

3HAC 16640-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach
Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit
(TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When
the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the
MOTORS OFF state.
To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented:
The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way.
During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as
there is no need for the robot to move.
The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when
entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control
over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points
must be observed:
The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position
to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link
or remote control panel.
The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector
is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the
working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.
Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices
mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

3HAC 16640-1

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

16

3HAC 16640-1

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

3HAC 16640-1

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic
materials and does not apply to soft or brittle materials.
Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure
description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are
only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

Screws with
slotted or cross
recess head

Screws with
hexagon socket
head

18

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the
tables below:

Dimension

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"

M2.5

0.25

M3

0.5

M4

1.2

M5

2.5

M6

5.0

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M5

M6

10

17

M8

24

28

40

M10

47

55

70

M12

82

95

120

3HAC 16640-1

Reference Information

3HAC 16640-1

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M16

200

235

300

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

Within all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are highlighted in this way.
ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using
lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

20

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator

Chapter 3:Manipulator
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all repair activities recommended for the manipulator, including the manipulators distribution box.
It is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific repair activity, e.g.
Removal or Refitting of a certain component on the manipulator. Each unit contains all information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers,
required special tools and materials.
The chapter is divided into:

3HAC 16640-1

Removal/refitting instructions for all the spare parts on the manipulator

Replacement instructions for all the spare parts in the manipulators distribution box

21

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Section A: Manipulator repairs


Removal of actuator, including motor

Location

The three actuators are located on the manipulator as shown in the figure below.

D
A

C
xx0200000296

22

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Actuator

Actuator servomotor

Lower joint

Actuator fork

Center tube

Wrist

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Hook wrench

Note
3 mm pin, shown in
figure the below!

xx0200000350

Safety

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!

3HAC 16640-1

23

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing to


remove an actuator.

Step

24

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the actuators to half way in length, and


ensure all the actuators are of equal length.
This is done in order to allow the actuator to
retract when the lower joint is unscrewed.

2.

Switch off the power supply.

3.

The weight of an actuator is around 40kg (88lb). Shown in the figure


Before removal, the actuator must therefore be above!
secured using straps, as the center unit will tend
to move away from the corner with the removed
actuator.
If the manipulator is vertically orientated, it is
important to anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to prevent this. For
other orientations, try to anticipate the movement
and secure accordingly.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of actuator

The procedure below details how to remove an actuator, including the motor. The
procedure is the same for all actuators. Make sure the preparatory work above is
done before removing an actuator!

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the eletric cabling from the servomotor located on the actuator to be
removed.
Move and secure the cabling so it can not
get damaged during removal of the actuator.

2.

Secure the actuator from above using


straps from a hoist or from the forks of a
fork lift.

3.

Use a heating gun to loosen the threadlocking substance, before unscrewing the
lower joint from the lower platform.

4.

To release the bottom end of the actuator Shown in the figure above!
from the lower platform, unscrew the lower Specified above!
joint using thehook wrench.
Make sure the center tube and wrist are
anchored as detailed in the preparatory
work above!

5.

Unscrew the four attachment screws hold- Shown in the figure above!
ing the actuator to the actuator fork.

6.

Gently remove the actuator and lift it safely


to a flat surface.

7.

Inspect the actuator fork and the thread in


the lower platform for damage.

8.

If only the actuator is to be replaced,


remove the servomotor as detailed below.

25

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of motor

The procedure below details how to remove the motor from a dismounted actuator.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Unscrew the four fixing screws


that hold the servomotor to the
actuator housing.

A
B
D
C
xx0200000302

26

2.

Remove the servomotor from


the actuator.

3.

If the toothed wheel ring stays


with the backlash-free coupling
attached to the actuator (shown
in the figure above), detach it
and fit it to the coupling on the
servomotor.

4.

Remove the coupling from the


actuator shaft.

A: Servomotor

B: Fixing screws (4 pcs)

C: Toothed wheel ring

D: Backlash-free coupling

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of actuator, including motor

Location

The actuators are located as shown in the figure below.

D
A

C
xx0200000296

3HAC 16640-1

Actuator

Actuator servomotor

27

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Lower joint

Actuator fork

Center tube

Wrist

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Actuator with motor

3HAC 17151-1

Note

Thread-locking substance

e.g. Loctite 242.


Used when securing
the lower joint to the
lower platform.

Hook wrench

3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Safety

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!

28

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
Please observe the following when refitting components:
- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.
The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

Refitting of motor

In case the servomotor has been removed from the actuator, refit it as detailed in
procedure below.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the backlash-free coupling


onto the new actuator.
Make sure the shaft lies flush
with the coupling surface, as
shown in figure to the right.

xx0200000303

3HAC 16640-1

A: Actuator shaft

B: 0mm

29

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Assemble the servomotor, back- 4 pcs; tightening torque: 24 Nm.


lash-free coupling and the actuator. Tighten the fixing screws of
the motor.

A
B
D
C
xx0200000302

Refitting of actuator

A: Servomotor

B: Fixing screws (4 pcs)

C: Toothed wheel ring

D: Backlash-free coupling

The procedure below details how to refit the actuator, including the motor. The
procedure is the same for all actuators.

Step

30

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Refit the motor, in case it has been


removed, as detailed above.

2.

Place the actuator in the actuator


fork by lifting it with a hoist.

Shown in the figure above!

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Push the actuator to the left so that


it is flush with the left hand side of
the fork, as shown with the arrow
in figure to the right.
The direction is the same for all
three actuators.

A
B
xx0200000304

A: Clamp

B: Circlip

4.

Adjust the circlip so that the actuator remains tight against the left
hand side.

5.

Fit the clamps and tighten the four 4 pcs; tightening torque: 10 Nm.
hexagonal screws that hold the
clamps.

6.

Fit the sealing caps onto either


side of the actuator fork as shown
in figure to the right.

xx0200000305

3HAC 16640-1

A: Sealing cap

31

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step

Commissioning

Action

Note/Illustration

7.

Refit the actuator by screwing the Shown in the figure above!


lower joint to the lower platform.
Use normal thread-locking fluid.
Note that, as each turn of the lower
joint will alter the length of the
actuator by 10 mm, the actuator
will be extended around 150 mm
as the universal joint is screwed in.

8.

Attach the supplied labels to the


actuator and motor; the warning
label close to the actuator fork and
the appropriate axis label on the
housing of the actuator.

9.

Reconnect the cables to the servomotor.

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting an actuator.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously
affect the performance and can, in the worst
case, cause damage to equipment.

3.

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data
folder is updated, specifying all details such
as what has been replaced and when, part
serial numbers and other related component
data.

Detailed in Installation
Manual.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.

32

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

3HAC 16640-1

33

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of servomotor, axes 1-3

Location

The servomotors of axes 1, 2 and 3 are located on top of the actuators, as shown
in the figure below.

xx0200000297

34

Servomotors, axes 1-3

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment

Safety

Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Circuit Diagram

Repair Manual, part 2

3HAC 16640-1

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of a motor.

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Support the wrist before disconnecting the servomotor from the actuator, in order to keep the lower
platform stable and reduce the risk of injury and/or
damage.

2.

Switch off the power supply.

3.

The weight of an actuator servomotor is around


14kg (31lb). The actuator may therefore need to
be secured using straps before being removed.

35

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Removal

Note/Illustration

The actuator is free to turn when the servomotor is


removed. If not correctly supported, the center unit
will tend to move away from the corner with the
removed actuator servomotor. In a vertically orientated manipulator, it is important to anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to
prevent this.
For manipulators in other orientations, try to anticipate the movement and secure accordingly.

The procedure below details how to remove the servomotor, axes 1, 2 and 3.

Step

36

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the eletric cabling from


the servomotor.
Move and secure the cabling so
that it can not get damaged during the removal of the actuator.

2.

Unscrew the four fixing screws


that hold the servomotor to the
actuator housing, as shown in
the figure below.

3.

Lift the servomotor straight up


from the actuator.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action

Note/Illustration

If the toothed wheel ring stays


with the backlash-free coupling
attached to the servomotor,
detach it and fit it to the coupling
on the actuator.

A
B
D
C
xx0200000302

5.

3HAC 16640-1

A: Servomotor

B: Fixing screws (4 pcs)

C: Toothed wheel ring

D: Backlash-free coupling on
servomotor shaft

Remove the coupling from the


servomotor shaft.

37

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of servomotor, axes 1-3

Location

The servomotors of axes 1, 2 and 3 are located on top of the actuators, as shown
in the figure below.

xx0200000297

38

Servomotors, axes 1-3

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.
Servomotor, axes
1-3

3HAC 17152-1

Circuit Diagram

Safety

Note

3HAC 16640-1

Repair Manual, part 2

Please read the following notations before the refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
Please observe the following when refitting components:
- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

3HAC 16640-1

The procedure below details how to refit the servomotor, axes 1-3.

39

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the backlash-free coupling Spare part no. specified above!


onto the new servomotor,
ensuring that the shaft enters
the coupling to a depth of 10
mm, as shown in figure to the
right.

A
xx0200000308

40

A: 10 0.5 mm

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Assemble the servomotor,


4 pcs; tightening torque: 24Nm.
backlash-free coupling and
the actuator. Tighten the fixing
screws.
Note! The brake performance
is reduced if the servomotor
shaft is pushed in too far into
the actuator. Make sure there
B
is a lash. Measure the distance between the coupling
D
C
and the contact surface,
according to the figure to the xx0200000302
right.
A: Servomotor

B: Fixing screws (4 pcs)

C: Toothed wheel ring

D: Backlash-free coupling on the


servomotor shaft
A

79

51

xx0200000447

3.

3HAC 16640-1

A: Coupling on actuator shaft

B: Coupling on servomotor shaft

79 mm, required distance


between coupling and contact
surface on actuator.

51 mm, required distance


between coupling and contact
surface on servomotor.

Reconnect the cables to the


servomotor.

41

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting motor on axes
1, 2 and 3.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously
affect the performance and can, in the worst
case, cause damage to equipment.

3.

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data
folder is updated, specifying all details such
as what has been replaced and when, part
serial numbers and other related component
data.

Detailed in Installation
Manual.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

42

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of servomotor, axis 4

Location

The motor unit of axis 4 is located inside the center tube sleeve, at the lower part
of the center unit, as shown in the figure below.

B
C

A
xx0200000299

3HAC 16640-1

Axis 4 motor unit (located beneath center tube sleeve)

Center tube sleeve

Spiral cable inspection cover

Gimbal

Lower platform

43

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Lifting bracket
String

Attach to the cabling to


be able to feed it
through the center tube
while lifting.

Circuit Diagram

Safety

3HAC 16640-1 Repair Manual, part 2

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of
pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

44

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of the motor unit on axis 4.

Step

Removal

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the actuators so that they are extended to


around 500 mm in length. All actuators should
have equal length.
This is done in order to allow enough space
between the center tube sleeve and the center
tube.

2.

Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively.

3.

Switch off the power supply.

The procedure below details how to remove the motor unit on axis 4. Make sure
the preparatory work above is done before removing the actuator!

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Cut the straps and disconnect the


cabling to axes 4, 5 and 6, at the top of
the center tube. Also remove the cable
guide for the cabling.

2.

Remove the top plate of the center


tube.
The cabling underneath the lid is still
attached! Remove the lid carefully!

3.

Note the position of each connector


and remove the cable connector holders from the lid. Attach a string to the
cabling in order not to drop it into the
center tube when lifting.

See the figure below!

45

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the housing and the lower


plate, exercising care with the cables
inside the housing. See figure to the
right for layout.

A
B
C
D

xx0200000306

46

5.

Fit the lifting tool to the center tube,


ensuring that the cables can pass
through the loop freely and not get
caught.

6.

Remove the spiral cable cover on the


back of center tube sleeve. Remove
also the spiral cable inspection cover.

A: Top plate of center


tube

B: Cable connector
holder

C: Housing

D: Lower plate

E: Center tube

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
7.

Action

Note/Illustration

Unscrew the 18 screws that hold the


center tube to the axis 4 motor and
remove the locating pin, center tube.

A
B

D
xx0200000363

A: 6 pcs: M8.

B: 12 pcs: M6.

C: Locating pin, center


tube

D: Locating pin, center


tube sleeve

On reassembly the same locating pin is refitted!

3HAC 16640-1

8.

Lift the center tube, using a hoist or lift, Shown in the figure above!
until the bottom of the center tube
almost reaches the gimbal.
When lifting the center tube, be very
careful not to stretch or squash the
cables inside. Eliminate the risk of
stretching the cabling by feeding it
through at the top at the same rate as
the center tube is lifted, with the help
of a string.

9.

Remove the cable clamp that holds


the spiral cable in place.

47

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

10.

Remove the 12 screws that hold the Shown in the figure above!
center tube sleeve to the lower platOn reassembly the same locatform interface.
ing pin is refitted!
Remove the locating pin that positions
the center tube sleeve.

11.

Lift the center tube sleeve, tilting the


wrist slightly for increased accessibility.

A
B
C

xx0200000307

48

12.

Make a note of the position of the


motor unit.

13.

Remove the spacer from the axis 4


motor unit.

14.

Unscrew the 8 screws that attach the


motor unit to the center shaft and
remove the motor unit.

15.

Check all surfaces to make sure they


are free from damage and contamination before proceeding with the
assembly routine.

A: center tube sleeve

B: Spacer

C: Axis 4 motor unit

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of servomotor, axis 4

Location

The motor unit of axis 4 is located inside the center tube sleeve, at the lower part
of the center unit, as shown in the figure below.

B
C

A
xx0200000299

3HAC 16640-1

Axis 4 motor unit (located inside the center tube sleeve)

Center tube sleeve

Spiral cable inspection cover

Gimbal

Lower platform

49

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.
Servomotor, axis 4

Note

3HAC 17153-1

Lifting bracket
Circuit Diagram

Safety

3HAC 16640-1

Repair Manual, part 2

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
Please observe the following when refitting components:
- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the motor unit, axis 4.

Step
1.

50

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the axis 4 motor unit to the center 8 pcs: tightening torque: 33
shaft and tighten the screws. Ensure it Nm.
has the same orientation as the old
one

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit and align the spacer to the axis 4


motor unit.

A
B
C

xx0200000307

3HAC 16640-1

3.

Refit the center tube sleeve, ensuring


that the locating pin, center tube
sleeve, has the correct orientation.
Tighten the 12 screws that hold the
sleeve.

4.

Refit the cable clamp for the spiral


cable.
Ensure that the spiral cable runs freely
360in either direction by manually
turning the wrist and watching the
cable through the inspection hole in
the side of the center tube.

5.

Align the fixing holes in the axis 4


motor unit to the holes in the center
tube sleeve by turning the wrist.

6.

Feed the cabling through the center


tube (with the help of the string) and
lower the center tube carefully in order
not to squash the cables.

A: Center tube sleeve

B: Spacer

C: Axis 4 motor unit

Shown in the figure above!


12 pcs; tightening torque:
17Nm.
Make sure to refit the correct
locating pin!

51

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
7.

Action

Note/Illustration

Locate the center tube using the location pin, center tube, as reference and
fit the 18 screws.

A
B

D
xx0200000363

A: 6 pcs: M8; tightening


torque: 40 Nm.

B: 12 pcs: M6; tightening torque: 17 Nm.

C: Locating pin, center


tube

D: Locating pin, center


tube sleeve

Make sure to refit the correct


locating pin!

52

8.

Refit the spiral cable inspection cover


and the spiral cable cover, including
their sealings.

9.

Remove the lifting tool from the center


tube.

Shown in the figure above!

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
10.

Action

Note/Illustration

Refit the lower plate and the housing to


the top of the center tube, taking extra
care not to squash any cables, or subject them to any undue stress.

A
B
C
D

xx0200000306

3HAC 16640-1

11.

Fit the cable connectors to the top


plate, ensuring that the cables are orientated the same way as when they
were removed.

12.

Fit the top plate to the housing.

13.

Refit the cable guide for the axes 4, 5


and 6 cabling and reconnect the
cabling previously disconnected.

A: Top plate

B: Cable connector
holder

C: Housing

D: Lower plate

E: Center tube

Shown in the figure above!

53

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the motor, axis
4.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously
affect the performance and can, in the worst
case, cause damage to equipment.

3.

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data
folder is updated, specifying all details such
as what has been replaced and when, part
serial numbers and other related component
data.

Detailed in Installation
Manual.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

54

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of lower joint

Location

The lower joint is located between the actuator and the lower platform, as shown
in the figure below.

C
D
A

xx0200000298

3HAC 16640-1

Lower joint (beneath the cover)

Lower platform

Actuator

Calibration spacer

55

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Hook wrench

3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Safety

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

56

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of the lower joint.

Step

Removal

Note/Illustration

1.

Run actuators to half way in length. All the actuators should also have an equal length.
This is done in order to allow the actuator to retract
when the lower joint is unscrewed.

2.

Switch off the power supply.

3.

In a vertically orientated manipulator the center


unit will tend to move away from the corner with the
removed lower joint. It is therefor important to
anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to avoid this. For manipulators in
other orientations, try to anticipate the movement
and secure accordingly.

The procedure below details how to remove a lower joint. The procedure is the
same for all actuators. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before separating the parts!
Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Use a heating gun to loosen the thread-locking substance, before removing the lower
joint.

2.

Loosen the actuator piston from the lower


joint with the hook wrenches.
The actuator is top heavy and will tend to
swing, once disconnected at the bottom.
Ensure that the actuator is well anchored.

3.

Loosen the lower joint from the lower platform Shown in figure above!
using a hook wrench, 3 mm pin.
Specified above!

4.

Remove the lower joint and the cover.

5.

Remove the calibration spacer from the lower


joint, in order to refit it onto the new joint!

Shown in the figure


above!
Specified above!

57

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of lower joint

Location

The lower joint is located between the actuator and the lower platform, as shown
in the figure below.

C
D
A

xx0200000298

58

Lower joint (beneath the cover)

Lower platform

Actuator

Calibration spacer

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Lower joint

3HAC 17154-1

Note

Thread-locking substance

e.g. Loctite 242.


Used when securing the lower joint to
the lower platform.

Hook wrench

3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Safety

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.

3HAC 16640-1

59

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Please observe the following when refitting components:


- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the lower joint. The procedure is the
same for all actuators.

Step

Commissioning

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the calibration spacer and the cover Spare part no. specified above!
to the new lower joint.

2.

Fit the lower joint to the actuator, using


normal thread-locking fluid.

3.

Refit the actuator by screwing the


lower joint into the lower platform.
Note that, as each turn of the lower
joint will alter the length of the actuator
by 10 mm, the actuator will be
extended around 150 mm as the universal joint is screwed in.

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the lower joint.

Step

60

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Failure to calibrate a robot will seriously affect
the performance and can, in the worst-case,
cause damage to equipment.

Detailed in Installation
Manual.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data folder
is updated, specifying all details such as what
has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

3HAC 16640-1

61

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of wrist

Location

The wrist is located on the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

E
C

F
A

xx0200000300

62

Wrist

Center tube

Spiral cable inspection cover

Gimbal

Center tube sleeve

Lower platform

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Lifting bracket

Safety

Punch tool

Used for the crossed roller


bearing.

Lifting jack

Stroke of at least 100 mm.

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

The wrist weighs 36 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

3HAC 16640-1

63

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of the wrist unit.

Step

64

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the actuators so that they are extended to


around 500 mm in length. All the actuators should
have equal length.
This is done in order to allow enough space
between the centre tube sleeve and the centre
tube.

2.

Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively.

3.

Switch off the power supply.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the wrist. Make sure the preparatory
work above is done before removing the wrist!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the 6 attachment screws that


hold the axis 4 motor unit to the centre
tube.

A
B

D
xx0200000363

3HAC 16640-1

A: Attachment screws,
axis 4 motor to centre
tube: 6 pcs, M8 x 60.

B: Attachment screws

C: Locating pin, centre


tube

D: Locating pin, centre


tube sleeve

2.

Remove the spiral cable cover on the Shown in the figure above!
back of centre tube sleeve and the spiral cable inspection cover on the
same sleeve.

3.

Remove the cable clamp that holds


the spiral cable in place.

65

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step

Note/Illustration

4.

Unscrew 10 of the 12 screws in the


Shown in the figure above!
wrist flange that hold the wrist to the
lower platform. Turn the wrist to
access all the screws.
Leave one screw at the front and one
at the rear of the wrist, but ensure that
they are both accessible for removal
without having to turn the wrist.

5.

Position the lifting jack underneath the


wrist housing, in its extended position,
so that it can lower the wrist at least
100 mm without being repositioned.

6.

Remove the final two screws.

7.

Lower the wrist gently until the screws


that attach the centre shaft to the wrist
are accessible.
If the wrist appears to be stuck, it
needs to be pressed out. Use two of
the fixing holes for the wrist/lower platform joint, that are threaded M8 and lie
180in relation to each other.
Note! Turn the wrist so that these
holes are not aligned with the M6
holes in the lower platform, as this will
damage the threads and hamper
assembly at a later stage. If possible,
insert a metal shim to protect the surface of the lower platform flange.
Insert two M8 bolts, with at least 40
mm of thread, into the holes, and pull
the wrist off the lower platform.

8.

66

Action

xx0200000364

Remove the screws and lower the


wrist while disconnecting the cabling.
Note! When removing the wrist: make
sure it is lowered carefully, following
the same orientation when mounted. If
tilted, the interface of the wrist and the
lower platform may be damaged!

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of wrist

Location

The wrist is located on the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

E
C

F
A

xx0200000300

3HAC 16640-1

Wrist

Center tube

Spiral cable inspection cover

Gimbal

Center tube sleeve

Lower platform

67

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment

Safety

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Wrist

3HAC 17155-1

Note

Punch tool

Used for the


crossed roller
bearing.

Lifting jack

Stroke of at least
100 mm.

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
Please observe the following when refitting components:
- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.
The wrist weighs 36 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

68

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the wrist.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Replace the o-ring on the centre shaft


with the new one that is included in the
spare parts kit. Ensure that the o-ring is
lubricated prior to fitment.

2.

Ensure that the jack is correctly positioned underneath the lower platform, and
that it is in its lowest position. Place the
wrist on the jack.

3.

Reconnect the cabling.

4.

Elevate the wrist with the jack and guide it


so that it fits onto the centre shaft. Ensure
that the cabling is guided into the correct
position and does not get jammed.
Note! Make sure the wrist is elevated in
the same direction that the centre tube is
pointing, so that the interfaces are not
damaged!

5.

Attach the centre shaft to the wrist using


the 12 screws.

xx0200000367

3HAC 16640-1

12 pcs; tightening torque: 17


Nm.

69

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step

Commissioning

Note/Illustration

6.

Lift the wrist with the jack until it is possi- 12 pcs; tightening torque: 10
ble to fasten the attachment screws
Nm.
through the wrist flange into the lower
Shown in the figure above!
platform. Press the wrist to its topmost
position by tightening two of the attachment screws, 180in relation to each
other.
Check that the bearing runs smoothly by
turning the wrist manually.

7.

Refit the spiral cable clamp and ensure


that the spiral cable twists freely throughout the 360of the axis 4 rotation.
It must not catch or have any tendency to
rub or over-tighten, as this will drastically
shorten the life of the cable.

8.

Align the holes in the centre tube sleeve


with the holes in the axis 4 motor unit by
turning the wrist.

Shown in the figure above!

9.

Fit the six M8 screws. Tighten them as


detailed to the right.

6 pcs: M8; tightening torque:


40 Nm.

10.

Refit the spiral cable cover and the spiral Shown in the figure above!
cable inspection cover with their sealings.

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting.

Step

70

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously
affect the performance and can, in the worst
case, cause damage to equipment.

Detailed in Installation
Manual.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data folder
is updated, specifying all details such as what
has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

3HAC 16640-1

71

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of center unit

Location

The center unit includes the center tube, wrist, spiral cable, linear guide and axis
4 motor unit. It is located in the center of the manipulator, as shown in the figure
below. When removed, the housing and the gimble is left mounted on the center
unit, as shown in the figure below.
C
I

H
G

E
B

A
F
xx0200000301

72

Center unit

Lower joint

Wrist unit

Upper platform

Center tube

Gimbal

Axis 4 motor unit (inside center


tube sleeve)

Linear guide

Lower platform

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Hook wrench

Note
3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Safety

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit weighs over 100 kg! All lifting equipment must be dimensioned
accordingly!

3HAC 16640-1

73

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of the center unit.

Step

Removal

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the actuators so that they are extended to


around 300 mm in length. All the actuators should
have equal length.
This is done in order to allow enough space for the
center unit to be removed.

2.

Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively.

3.

Switch off the power supply.

The procedure below details how to remove the center unit. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removal!

Step
1.

74

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect the cabling running


into the center unit, at the top of
the center unit.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Secure the center unit with a


strap attached to a hoist or lift.
Fasten the strap around the
body of the center tube just
below the upper housing so
that it hangs well balanced, in
such a way that the center unit
will be easy to handle.
Note! The center unit weighs
over 100 kg and must be
secured properly when the gimbal and actuator joints are disconnected as the unit will tend
to move suddenly as it is top
heavy.

xx0200000365

3HAC 16640-1

3.

Use a heating gun at the lower


joint, to loosen the thread-locking substance before removing
the joint.

4.

Remove the actuators from the Shown in the figure above!


lower platform by disconnect- Specified above!
ing the lower joints from the
lower platform using the hook
wrench.
Note! The actuators are top
heavy and will turn when
released from the lower platform. Ensure that they are fastened before releasing them
after removal.

75

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
5.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the center unit from


Shown in the figure above!
the upper platform by removing
the 4 attachment screws,
located as shown in the figure
to the right.
Note! The gimbal weighs
approximately 20 kg, be careful A
when removing the attachment
screws!

xx0200000309

76

A: Attachment screws that hold


the gimbal to the upper platform (4 pcs)

6.

Lower the gimbal to the bottom Shown in the figure above!


of the run of the linear guides
so that it rests securely. Secure
it to the center unit so that it
does not turn or move suddenly
when the center unit is
released.

7.

Lower the center unit with the


hoist.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of center unit

Location

The center unit includes the center tube, wrist and axis 4 motor unit. It is located
in the center of the manipulator, as shown in the figure below. When removed, the
housing and the gimble is left mounted on the center unit, as shown in the figure
below.

C
I

H
G

E
B

A
F
xx0200000301

3HAC 16640-1

Center unit

Lower joint

Wrist

Upper platform

Center tube

Gimbal

Axis 4 motor unit (inside center


tube sleeve)

Linear guide

Lower platform

77

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Center Unit

3HAC 17156-1

Note

Thread-locking substance

e.g. Loctite 242.


Used when securing
the lower joint to the
lower platform.

Hook wrench

3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.

78

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Please observe the following when refitting components:


- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.
The center unit weighs over 100 kg! All lifting equipment must be dimensioned
accordingly!

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the center unit.

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Lift the center unit in position with the hoist.

2.

Insert the four screws that Shown in the figure above!


hold the gimbal to the upper
platform, but do not tighten
them. Just screw them in to
the point where it is still possible to move the gimbal in
relation to the upper platform.

79

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Push the gimbal to the left


(as seen when facing the
front of the robot) so that the
surfaces of the master lie
flush, as shown in the figure
to the right.

B
C

xx0200000310

80

A: center unit

B: Gimbal

C: Upper platform

D: Master

E: Direction for pushing the gimbal

4.

Tighten the 4 screws.

5.

Refit the actuators by


Shown in the figure above!
screwing the lower joint of
each actuator to the lower
platform, with the hook
wrench and using normal
thread-locking fluid.
Note that, as each turn of
the lower joint will alter the
length of the actuator by 10
mm, the actuator will be
extended around 150 mm
as the universal joint is
screwed in.

4 pcs; tightening torque: 40 Nm.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the center unit.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Detailed in Installation
Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect Manual.
the performance and can, in the worst case,
cause damage to equipment.

3.

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data folder
is updated, specifying all details such as what
has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

3HAC 16640-1

81

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of spiral cable

Location

The spiral cable is located inside the center tube, running from the top of the
manipulator to the wrist unit.

C
A
xx0200000312

82

Spiral cable

Spiral cable inspection cover

Wrist unit

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Safety

Note
These procedures
include references
to the tools
required.

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed.
- Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of
pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

3HAC 16640-1

83

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the
removal of the spiral cable.

Step

Removal

Note/Illustration

1.

Run the actuators so that they are extended to


around 500 mm in length. All the actuators should
have equal length.
This is done in order to allow enough space for the
center tube to be removed.

2.

Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0 respectively.

3.

Switch off the power supply.

The procedure below details how to remove the spiral cable. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removal!

Step

84

Action

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the axis 4 motor unit.

Detailed in Removal of servomotor, axis 4.

2.

Remove the wrist unit.

Detailed in Removal of wrist


unit.

3.

Remove the cable clamp that holds the


spiral cable to the center shaft and remove
the spiral cable.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of spiral cable

Location

The spiral cable is located inside the center tube, running from the top of the
manipulator down to the wrist unit.

C
A
xx0200000312

3HAC 16640-1

Spiral cable

Spiral cable inspection cover

Wrist unit

85

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Spiral Cable

3HAC 17157-1

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Safety

Note
These procedures
include references
to the tools required.

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
Please observe the following when refitting components:
- Carefully clean the mating surfaces.
- Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or
replacing.
- Replace all gaskets.
The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of
pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

86

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the spiral cable.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the new spiral cable and refit


Spare part no. specified above!
the cable clamp that holds the spiral cable to the centre shaft.
Make sure that the spiral cable is
properly attached so that it can not
run up and down on the shaft.
Press down the spiral cable so that
the first bend is tightly secured
against the upper surface of the
shaft as shown in the figure to the
right!

2.

Refit the wrist unit.

Detailed in Refitting of wrist unit.

3.

Refit the axis 4 motor unit.

Detailed in Refitting of servomotor,


axis 4.

xx0200000366

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the spiral cable
and wrist unit.

Step
1.

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

Check the manipulator and its surrounding


equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and
bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects
remain within the workspace.

87

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

2.

Recalibrate the robot.


Detailed in Installation
Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect Manual.
the performance and can, in the worst case,
cause damage to equipment.

3.

When the spare part replacements have been


completed, ensure that the machine data folder
is updated, specifying all details such as what
has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or
maintenance), it is vital that:
- all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.
- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its
reach behind any safety fences, etc.
- special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

88

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Section B: Distribution box repairs


Replacement of battery, distribution box

Location

The battery is located in the distribution box as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000394

3HAC 16640-1

Serial measurement card

Battery

89

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.
Battery

Safety

Note

4944026-4

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller
or units connected to the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to
ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the battery from the distribution box.

Step

90

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Note the position of the battery and cable ties.

Shown in the figure


above!

2.

Remove the battery connector connecting the


battery to the serial measurement circuit board.

3.

Cut the two cable ties and remove the battery.


The battery must be disposed of through the
appropriate recycling channels.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the battery to the distribution box.

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Place the new battery on top of the serial


measurement card cover.

Part no. specified above!


Shown in the figure
above!

2.

Use cable ties to fix the battery.

3.

Connect the electrical connector.

91

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Replacement of serial measurement card, distribution box

Location

The serial measurement card is located in the distribution box as shown in the
figure below.

xx0200000394

92

Serial measurement card

Battery

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Serial Measurement card

Safety

Note

3HAC 14505-1

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller
or units connected to the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to
ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the serial measurement card from the
distribution box.

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the four electrical connectors attached


to the serial measurement card.

2.

Remove the three screws holding the card and


the battery to the enclosure.

3.

Remove the serial measurement card together


with the battery.

Shown in the figure


above!

4.

Remove the battery from the card.

The battery is refitted


on to the new card.

93

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the serial measurement card to the distribution box.

Step

94

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the battery to the new serial measurement


card.

Part no. specified


above!
Shown in the figure
above!

2.

Carefully fit the card and the battery in place.

3.

Refit the three screws holding the serial measurement card and the battery to the enclosure.

4.

Refit the four electrical connectors.

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Replacement of brake release card, distribution box

Location

The brake release card is located in the distribution box as shown in the figure
below.

xx0200000393

3HAC 16640-1

Brake release card

Brake release buttons

95

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Brake Release card

Safety

Note

3HAC 0017-1

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller
or units connected to the controller:
Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to
ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the brake release card from the distribution box.

Step

96

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the three electrical connectors attached


to the brake release card.

2.

Remove the four screws holding the card to the


enclosure.

3.

Remove the brake release card.

Shown in the figure


above!

3HAC 16640-1

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the brake release card to the distribution
box.

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Carefully fit the new brake release card in


place.

Part no. specified above!


Shown in the figure
above!

2.

Refit the four screws holding the brake


release card to the enclosure.

3.

Replace the three electrical connectors.


Note! It is very important that all screening is
reconnected correctly in order to achieve
maximum performance from the equipment.

97

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

98

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Chapter 4:Controller
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all repair activities recommended for the controller.
It is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific repair activity, e.g.
Removal or Refitting of a certain component in the controller. Each unit contains
all information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers, required
special tools and materials.
The chapter is divided into:

3HAC 16640-1

Removal instructions for all components

Refitting instructions for all components

Remaining instructions

99

Controller repair

Putting the computer unit in the service position

Location of computer unit

The computer unit is located as shown in the figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Opening

Computer unit

The procedure below details how to open the computer unit.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Motors and gears are HOT after running the robot! Burns may result from touching the motors or gears!
- Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!
- Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse
as parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing
motor, axis 2.

100

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Make sure the ESD-wrist


band is worn and connected
to ground.

2.

Disconnect all connectors/


cables and make sure they
do not obstruct pulling the
computer unit out.

3.

Unscrew the transport locks


in both corners of the computer unit. This is done by
turning the screw two turns
(see position 1 in the figure)
and pushing the lock washers towards the screw (see
position 2).

4.

Lift the two handles and


push them together to
release the computer unit
(see position 1 in the figure).

xx0200000016

xx0200000017

5.

3HAC 16640-1

Push the locking device on See the figure above!


the front of the computer unit
to the right (see position 2 in
the figure).

101

Controller repair

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

6.

Pull the computer unit out of


the cabinet until it locks in its
end position. Then swing it
to the left as shown in the
figure.

7.

If work is to be performed on
the computer unit while in
the service position, it must
be locked in this position.
This is done by placing the
puck (located on the lower
left side) on the metal bar.
Alternatively, the computer
unit may be lifted straight up
and placed on a work bench.

xx0200000018

Closing

The procedure below details how to close the computer unit.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Motors and gears are HOT after running the robot! Burns may result from touching the motors or gears!
- Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!
- Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse
as parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing
motor, axis 2.

Step
1.

102

Action

Note/Illustration

Swing the computer unit back into


position and secure it.

See the figure above!


Also see the procedure above!

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Replacement of air filter, controller

Location of air filter

The air filter is located in the air filter magazine in the front hatch.

A
xx0200000284

Air filter magazine

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Air filter

3HAB 8028-1

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

3HAC 16640-1

Note
These procedures include references to the
tools required.

103

Controller repair

Removal, air filter

The procedure below details how to remove the air filter.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Open the bottom of the air filter


magazine as shown in the figure.

2.

Unlock the lower springs. Lower


the magazine and remove.

3.

Remove the old filter by releasing


the lock shackle and lifting it.
Note! In cases of less contamination, the air filter may be cleaned
and refitted. The procedure for
this is detailed in section "Cleaning the air filter, controller" in the
Maintenance Manual.

xx0200000001

xx0200000003

Refitting, air filter

The procedure below details how to refit the air filter.

Step
1.

104

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the air filter in the magazine. Art. no. is specified above!

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the spring at the top of the air


filter magazine into the cabinet
door and push upwards inwards.
Push until the lower springs
snap into the cabinet door.

xx0200000006

3HAC 16640-1

105

Controller repair

Replacement of battery unit, controller

Location of battery unit

The battery unit is located at the bottom of the controller.

A
xx0200000103

Battery unit

Required equipment

106

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art no.

Note

Battery unit

3HAC 5393-2

To be replaced as
a complete unit

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art no.

Note

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal, battery
unit

These procedures include references to the


tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the battery unit by


unscrewing its attachment
screws (1).
X1

X1

X1

X2

X2

X2

X1

X2

X3

xx0200000004

2.

3HAC 16640-1

Pull the battery unit out.

107

Controller repair

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect the three cables


from the battery unit.

xx0200000005

Refitting, battery
unit

The procedure below details how to refit the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

108

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Place the battery unit close to its position.

Art. no. specified above!


See illustration above!

2.

Reconnect the cables and push the unit into


position.

See illustration above!

3.

Secure it with the attachment screws.

See illustration above!

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Replacement of I/O and gateway units

Location of I/O
and gateway units

The I/O and gateway units are located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000009

3HAC 16640-1

I/O and gateway units located beneath the top cover of the cabinet

Four available slots for I/O and gateway units

109

Controller repair

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Removal

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Digital 24 VDC I/O

3HAB 7229-1

DSQC 328

Analog I/O

3HNE 00554-1 DSQC 355

AD Combi I/O

3HAB 7230-1

DSQC 327

Digital 120 VAC I/O

3HAB 7231-1

DSQC 320

Digital I/O with relays

3HAB 9669-1

DSQC 332

Gateway for Allen-Bradley,


RIO

3HNE00025-1 DSQC 350

Gateway for Interbus-S

3HNE00006-1 DSQC 351

Gateway for Profibus DP,


slave unit

3HNE00009-1 DSQC 352

The procedure below details how to remove an I/O or gateway board.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

110

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect any connec- The actual number of connectors vary


tors from the unit. Note depending on type of unit.
which connector goes
where, to facilitate reassembly.

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Lift the unit until the


upper claw, that holds
the unit to the rail, is
released. Use:
a screwdriver
when replacing
I/O units (position 2a in the figure).

by hand when
replacing a gateway unit (position 2b in the
figure).

2a

3a

2b

3b

xx0200000010

3.

Refitting

With the upper claw


released, tip the unit
away from the mounting
rail and remove it (positions 3a and 3b in the
figure).

The procedure below details how to refit an I/O or gateway board.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

Hook the unit back onto the mounting rail and


snap it gently in position.

111

Controller repair

Step
2.

112

Action

Note/Illustration

Reconnect all connectors disconnected during


removal.

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Replacement of bleeder resistor

Location of
bleeder resistor

The bleeder resistor is located behind the drive units, as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

3HAC 16640-1

Drive units

Bleeder resistor unit

System fan unit

Rectifier (drive unit)

Power supply unit

113

Controller repair

Required equipment

Removal

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Bleeder resistor

3HAC 4560-5

Note

The procedure below details how to remove the bleeder resistor.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Swing the power supply Detailed in section "Replacement of power


unit out of the way.
supply unit".

2.

Remove the drive units. Detailed in section "Replacement of drive units


and rectifier".

3.

Disconnect the cable


secured on top of the
bleeder resistor unit
(see position 1 in the figure).

1
2

xx0200000015

4.

114

Remove the bleeder


resistor unit from the
enclosure (see position
2 in the figure).

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the bleeder resistor.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the bleeder resistor into position and


secure it with the spring.

Art. no. specified above!


Also see the figure
above!

2.

Secure the cable disconnected during disassembly.

3.

Refit the drive unit.

Detailed in section
"Replacement of drive
units and rectifier".

4.

Swing the power supply unit back into position.

Detailed in section
"Replacement of power
supply unit".

115

Controller repair

Replacement of mass storage memory

Location of mass
storage memory

The mass storage memory is located in the computer system, which is shown in
the figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Computer system

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Mass storage memory, 3HAC 7519-2


64 MB
Mass storage memory, 3HAC 7519-3
128 MB

116

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal

These procedures include references to the


tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the mass storage memory.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Put the computer unit in the


service position.

Detailed in section "Putting the computer in the service position".

2.

Remove the cover from the


right side of the computer system by unscrewing the ten M5
screws (item 1 in the figure).

xx0200000019

3.

3HAC 16640-1

Disconnect the connectors


X1 and X2 from the front of
the mass storage memory
(item 2 in the figure).

See figure above!

117

Controller repair

Step
4.

Refitting

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the mass storage


See figure above!
memory by unscrewing its M4
attachment screws as shown
in the figure (items 3 and 4 in
the figure).

The procedure below details how to refit the mass storage memory.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the mass storage mem- Art. no. is specified above!


ory in position and secure it
1
with its M4 attachment
screws (items 3 and 4 in
the figure)
3

xx0200000019

2.

118

Reconnect connectors X1 See the figure above!


and X2 to the front of the
computer unit (item 2 in the
figure).

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

3.

Refit the cover on the right See the figure above!


side of the computer unit
and secure it with its ten M5
attachment screws (item 1
in the figure).

4.

Put the computer system


Detailed in section "Putting the computer in
back in its regular operation the service position".
position.

119

Controller repair

Replacement of internal cooling fan

Location of internal cooling fan

The internal cooling fan is located in the computer system, which is shown in the
figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Computer system

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Internal cooling fan

3HAC 6655-1

Two fans required

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

120

These procedures
include references
to the tools
required.

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the internal cooling fan.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

Put the computer unit in the service position.

Detailed in "Putting the computer in


the service position".

121

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect the connector E5 or


E6 respectively, depending on
which fan is to be replaced.

E
xx0200000020

3.

Refitting

Remove the internal cooling fan


inwards by gently pressing the
locking tabs upwards.

A: Upper fan

B: Lower fan

C: Locking tabs

D: Connector E5

E: Connector E6

See the figure above!

The procedure below details how to refit the internal cooling fan.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!

122

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Tip the internal cooling fan with its top towards Art. no. specified above!
the cabinet wall and fit it into the hole (see the
figure).

xx0200000021

2.

3HAC 16640-1

With the wall between the upper lock spring


hooks, push the fan unit upward and inward
until the locking tab snaps to the wall.

A: Push direction

See the figure above!

123

Controller repair

Step

124

Action

Note/Illustration

3.

Reconnect the connector E5 or E6 respectively, depending on which fan was replaced.

4.

Put the computer unit back in the regular


operation position.

Detailed in "Putting the


computer in the service
position".

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Replacement of drive units and rectifier

Location of drive
units and rectifier

The drive units and rectifier are located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

3HAC 16640-1

Drive units

Bleeder resistor unit

System fan unit

Rectifier (drive unit)

Power supply unit

125

Controller repair

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Drive unit (rectifier)

3HAB 8101-17

DSQC 545A

Drive unit, axes 1-6

3HAB 8101-18

DSQC 546A

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal

These procedures include references to the


tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the drive units.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

126

Action

Note/Illustration

Swing the power supply


unit out of the way.

Detailed in section "Replacement of power


supply unit"

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect connectors X1
and X2, four connectors
each (see position 1 in the
figure).
1

xx0200000013

3.

Remove the power supply See figure above!


bar in front of the drive
units (see position 2 in the
figure).

4.

Lift the spring to release


the drive unit and pull it
slightly outwards (see
position 3 in the figure).

xx0200000014

5.

3HAC 16640-1

Tip it out and remove it


(see position 4 in the figure).

See figure above!

127

Controller repair

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the drive units.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

128

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the unit into position and secure it with the


spring.

Also see figure above!

2.

Refit the power bar in front of the unit.

3.

Reconnect all connectors X1 and X2.

4.

Swing the power supply unit back into position. Detailed in section
"Replacement of power
supply unit"

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Replacement of system fan unit

Location of system fan unit

The system fan unit is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

3HAC 16640-1

Drive units

Bleeder resistor unit

System fan unit

Rectifier (drive unit)

Power supply unit

129

Controller repair

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

System fan unit

3HAC 12924-2

Note

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal

These procedures include references to the


tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the bleeder


resistor unit.

Detailed in "Replacement of bleeder resistor" in


the Repair Manual.

2.

Disconnect the cable


(see position 1 in the
figure).

xx0200000008

130

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Step
3.

Refitting

Action

Note/Illustration

Pull the back of the


system fan unit
upwards to free it and
then tip it out of the
enclosure (see position 2 in the figure).

The procedure below details how to refit the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

3HAC 16640-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the system fan unit into position and


Art. no. specified above!
secure it (see position 2 in the figure above).

2.

Reconnect the cable disconnected during


disassembly (see position 1 in the figure
above).

3.

Refit the bleeder resistor unit.

Detailed in section
"Replacement of bleeder
resistor" in the Repair
Manual.

131

Controller repair

Replacement of power supply unit

Location of power
supply unit

The power supply unit is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000011

Power supply unit locking spring (view from front)

Power supply unit folded out from the cabinet (view from above)

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Power supply unit

3HAB 4297-1

DSQC 506

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

132

These procedures include references to the


tools required.

3HAC 16640-1

Controller repair

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the power supply unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Push the power supply


Shown in figure above!
unit locking spring down
to release the power supply unit.

2.

Swing the unit out of the


cabinet.

3.

Remove the cable straps


on top of the power supply unit (see position 1 in
the figure).

Shown in figure above

xx0200000012

3HAC 16640-1

4.

Disconnect the cables at


the back of the unit (see
position 2 in the figure).

5.

Remove the screw (see


position 3 in the figure).

133

Controller repair

Step
6.

Refitting

Action

Note/Illustration

Lift the unit straight up to


release it from the hooks
and remove it outwards
(see position 4 in the figure).

The procedure below details how to refit the power supply unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

134

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the power supply unit into position onto its


hooks and secure it with the attachment
screws (see position 3 and 4 in figure in the
section Removal).

Art. no. specified above!

2.

Reconnect all connectors disconnected during


removal (see position 2 in figure).

3.

Secure the cables on top of the unit with new


cable straps (see position 1 in figure).

4.

Swing the unit back into the cabinet and secure


it with the locking spring.

3HAC 16640-1

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept

Chapter 5:Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept


Introduction
Definitions

This chapter contains all the circuit diagrams for the IRB 940 Tricept.

3HAC 16640-1

135

contact
R1 SMB
contact
R1 MP

3HAC 16640-1

en0200000410

=M1/2, Potentials from control

+EC1
+EC1

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/2, Potentials from control

136

3HAC 16640-1

-XM1.1

WM1

-XM1

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

en0200000411

Motor
axis 1

+M1

4.0

+EC1

M
3

A2

A1

PE

D6

A3

A4

D8

A5

A6

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE

AWG16
yel/gr

D10

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

4.3
PE1

-RT1

C1

-Y1

AWG20
blue

10

=M1/3, Axis 1

AWG20
blue

C3

CE

CE

-SMB
9.5
Serial
measuring
board

-XR1.1

WR1

-XR1

AWG22
blue

-XP1-4

14

R2.SMB1-4

15

18

Resolver 1

-B1

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/3, Axis 1

137

3HAC 16640-1

-XM2.1

WM2

-XM2

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

en0200000412

Motor
axis 2

+M2

3.0

+EC1

A8

A7

PE

A9

A10

A11 A12

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE
PE

PE

5.3

PE1

3.4

PE1

C4

-Y2

AWG20
blue

10

=M1/4, Axis 2

-RT2

AWG20
blue

C5

CE

CE

-SMB
9.5
Serial
measuring
board

-XR2.1

WR2

-XR2

AWG22
blue

-XP1-4

16

R2.SMB1-4

17

19

Resolver 2

-B2

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/4, Axis 2

138

3HAC 16640-1

-XM3.1

WM3

-XM3

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

en0200000414

Motor
axis 3

+M3

3.0

+EC1

PE

A13 A14 C13 A15 A16 C14 B1

B2

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE
PE

PE

6.3

PE1

4.3

PE1

C15

-RT3

C6

-Y3

AWG20
blue

10

=M1/5, Axis 3

AWG20
blue

C7

CE

CE

-SMB
9.5
Serial
measuring
board

-XR3.1

WR3

-XR3

AWG22
blue

-XP1-4

21

10

R2.SMB1-4

22

20

Resolver 3

-B3

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/5, Axis 3

139

3HAC 16640-1

Wmotor4.1

-XMTR4

Wmotor4

-XM4.1

PE

WM4

B4

D11

B3

-XM4

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

en0200000415

Motor
axis 4

+M4

3.0

+EC1

D12

B5
D13

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE
PE

7.3

PE1

5.3

PE1

-RT4

C8

-Y4

AWG20
blue

10

=M1/6, Axis 4

AWG20
blue

C9

CE

CE

-SMB
9.5
Serial
measuring
board

Wmotor4.1

-XMTR4

-XR4.1

WR4

-XR4

AWG22
blue

-XP3-6

12

13

14

15

R2.SMB3-6

14

15

11

10

18

Resolver 4

-B4

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/6, Axis 4

140

3HAC 16640-1

-XM5.1

Wmotor5
18x

-XMTR5-6

PE

WM5

B6

en0200000416

Motor
axis 5

D15

B7

-XM5

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

Wmotor_5-6
Spiral 28x

+M5

3.0

+EC1

D14

B8

D9

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE
PE

12

8.3

PE1

6.3

PE1

-RT5

10

11

-Y5

-X5

AWG20
blue

CE

CE

-SMB

Wbrake5

-XR5.1

WR5

-XR5

AWG22
blue

-XP3-6

Wmotor5

-XMTR5-6

9.5
Serial
measuring
board

Wmotor6_and_brake 5

18

10

=M1/7, Axis 5

AWG20
blue

C11 C10

21

22

16

24

R2.SMB3-6

23

17

20

19

19

Resolver 5

-B5

25

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/7, Axis 5

141

3HAC 16640-1

-XMTR5-6

Wmotor_5-6

+M6

en0200000417

Motor
axis 6

PE

WM6

-XM6.1

B10

B9

-XM6

AWG16
grey

-R1MP

motor6_and_brake 5

3.0

+EC1

B11

AWG16
yel/gr

-XTPE

PE

16

9.1

PE1

7.3

PE1

14

15

C12

-Y6

AWG20
blue

27

36

10

=M1/8, Axis 6

-RT6

AWG20
blue

C2

CE

CE

-SMB
9.5
Serial
measuring
board

-XR6.1

WR6

-XR6

AWG22
blue

-XP3-6

30

31

21

33

10

R2.SMB3-6

32

22

29

28

20

Resolver 6

-B6

34

CE

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/8, Axis 6

142

3HAC 16640-1

PE1

earth conn.
(screw)
distribution
box chassie

AWG10
yel/gr

-XTPE

R1MP D1

AWG20
blue

=M1
+FO

earth conn. (screw)


manip. foot

earth conn. (screw)


distribution box outside

8.3/

en0200000418

3.0

EC1

D2

AWG10
5m
yel/gr

PE

D3
D4

earth conn.
(screw)
cover

earth conn.
(screw)
mounting plate

PE

-SMB
3.6
Serial
measuring
board

R2SMB
9

=M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connections

PE

WSMB
canbus
8x

R1SMB A

CE

CE

R2G 2

blue

7,2VDC/4Ah
Battery

-G

black

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connec-

143

3HAC 16640-1

en0200000419

3.0

+EC1

-BU

Brake
release
unit

-X9

-X8

AWG16
blue

-R1MP

10

11

B14 B15

-X10
5

=M1/10 Brake release unit

AWG16
blue

B16 B12 B13

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/10 Brake release unit

144

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus

Chapter 6:Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus


Introduction
Definitions

This chapter contains the circuit diagram for the controller S4Cplus. The chapter is divided into the separate systems..

3HAC 16640-1

145

Sheet 1-1. Block Diagram

System 1: General information

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-1.

3HAC 16640-1

146

Sheet 1-2. View of Control Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-2.

3HAC 16640-1

147

Sheet 1-3. View of Control Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-3.

3HAC 16640-1

148

Sheet 1-4. Designation

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-4.

3HAC 16640-1

149

Sheet 1-5. Designation

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-5.

3HAC 16640-1

150

Sheet 2-1. Mains Connection

System 2: Mains Connection and Power Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-1.

3HAC 16640-1

151

Sheet 2-2. Transformer Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-2.

3HAC 16640-1

152

Sheet 2-3. Power Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-3.

3HAC 16640-1

153

Sheet 2-4. Power Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-4.

3HAC 16640-1

154

Sheet 2-5. External transformer unit 200-500V IRB6600/7600

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-5.

3HAC 16640-1

155

Sheet 2-6. Transformer unit 400-475V IRB 6600/7600

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-6.

3HAC 16640-1

156

Sheet 3-1. Block Diagram/Computer Unit

System 3: Computer Unit and Connector Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-1.

3HAC 16640-1

157

Sheet 3-2. Cabling in Computer Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-2.

3HAC 16640-1

158

Sheet 3-3. Main Computer and Hard Disk / Flash Disk Drive

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-3.

3HAC 16640-1

159

Sheet 3-4. Compute Cooling

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-4.

3HAC 16640-1

160

Sheet 3-5. Base Connector Board and I/O Computer

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-5.

3HAC 16640-1

161

Sheet 3-6. Connector Board and I/O Computer

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-6.

3HAC 16640-1

162

Sheet 3-7. Connector Board and Axis Computer

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-7.

3HAC 16640-1

163

Sheet 3-8. Base Connector Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-8.

3HAC 16640-1

164

Sheet 3-9. Connector Plate on Controller Panel

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-9.

3HAC 16640-1

165

Sheet 4-1. Emergency Stop

System 4: Emergency Stops and Run Chain

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-1.

3HAC 16640-1

166

Sheet 4-2. Run Chain

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-2.

3HAC 16640-1

167

Sheet 4-3. Run Chain

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-3.

3HAC 16640-1

168

Sheet 4-4. Power Unit Servo Disconnector

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-4.

3HAC 16640-1

169

Sheet 5-1. Block Diagram

System 5: Drive System and Robot Cable

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-1.

3HAC 16640-1

170

Sheet 5-2. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-2.

3HAC 16640-1

171

Sheet 5-3. Drive System Signal Connection 2 Drive Units

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-3.

3HAC 16640-1

172

Sheet 5-4. Drive System Signal Connection 3 Drive Units

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-4.

3HAC 16640-1

173

Sheet 5-5. Servo Drive Units / IRB 140

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-5.

3HAC 16640-1

174

Sheet 5-6. Servo Drive Units / IRB 340

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-6.

3HAC 16640-1

175

Sheet 5-7. Servo Drive Units / IRB 640, 840

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-7.

3HAC 16640-1

176

Sheet 5-8. Servo Drive Units / IRB 1400, 2400

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-8.

3HAC 16640-1

177

Sheet 5-9. Servo Drive Units / IRB 4400, 6400S/PE

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-9.

3HAC 16640-1

178

Sheet 5-10. Servo Drive Units / IRB 6400R

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-10.

3HAC 16640-1

179

Sheet 5-11. Control Cable IRB 140

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-11.

3HAC 16640-1

180

Sheet 5-12. Control Cable IRB 340, 1400 and 2400

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-12.

3HAC 16640-1

181

Sheet 5-13. Control Cable IRB 640, 840, 4400 and 6400S/PE

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-13.

3HAC 16640-1

182

Sheet 5-14. Control Cable IRB 6400R

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-14.

3HAC 16640-1

183

Sheet 5-15. Rectifier, fans and bleeder

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-15.

3HAC 16640-1

184

Sheet 5-16. Servo Drive System

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-16.

3HAC 16640-1

185

Sheet 5-17. Control cable

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-17.

3HAC 16640-1

186

Sheet 6-1. External axes

System 6: External axes

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-1.

3HAC 16640-1

187

Sheet 6-2. Axes Computer 2 and Connector Board

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-2.

3HAC 16640-1

188

Sheet 6-3. Expansion Board Axis Connector Board

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-3.

3HAC 16640-1

189

Sheet 6-4. Drive System Signal Connection External Axes

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-4.

3HAC 16640-1

190

Sheet 6-5. External axes no. 7th - 9th Control Signal Connection

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-5.

3HAC 16640-1

191

Sheet 6-6. Axis Computer 2 and Axis Connector Unit if External Axis Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-6.

3HAC 16640-1

192

Sheet 6-7. Connection to External Axis Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-7.

3HAC 16640-1

193

Sheet 6-8. Servogun-SMB power/signals cable

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-8.

3HAC 16640-1

194

Sheet 7-1. I/O Unit Position

System 7: I/O Units and Field Bus Modules

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-1.

3HAC 16640-1

195

Sheet 7-2. Digital Part of Combi I/O and Digital I/O Unit Input Part

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-2.

3HAC 16640-1

196

Sheet 7-3. Digital I/O Unit Output Part

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-3.

3HAC 16640-1

197

Sheet 7-4. Combi I/O Unit Digital and Analogue Output Part

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-4.

3HAC 16640-1

198

Sheet 7-5. Digital Input Part of 120V AC I/O Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-5.

3HAC 16640-1

199

Sheet 7-6. Digital Output Part of 120V AC I/O Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-6.

3HAC 16640-1

200

Sheet 7-7. Relay I/O Unit Input 1-16

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-7.

3HAC 16640-1

201

Sheet 7-8. Digital with Relays I/O Output 1-8

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-8.

3HAC 16640-1

202

Sheet 7-9. Digital with Relays I/O Output 9-16

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-9.

3HAC 16640-1

203

Sheet 7-10. Analogue I/O Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-10.

3HAC 16640-1

204

Sheet 7-11. Remote I/O Unit For Allen Bradley PLC

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-11.

3HAC 16640-1

205

Sheet 7-12. Interbus-S Master/Slave - Interbus-S Master

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-12.

3HAC 16640-1

206

Sheet 7-13. Profibus DP SLave

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-13.

3HAC 16640-1

207

Sheet 7-14. Encoder Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-14.

3HAC 16640-1

208

Sheet 7-15. Profibus DP Master/Slave

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-15.

3HAC 16640-1

209

Sheet 7-16. Interbus master/slave optical fibre and copper wire

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-16.

3HAC 16640-1

210

Sheet 8-1. Floppy Disk

System 8: Other options

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-1.

3HAC 16640-1

211

Sheet 8-2. Service Equipment Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-2.

3HAC 16640-1

212

Sheet 8-3. External Connections System Signals

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-3.

3HAC 16640-1

213

Sheet 8-4. Position Switches on Manipulator

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-4.

3HAC 16640-1

214

Sheet 8-5. Customer Signals

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-5.

3HAC 16640-1

215

Sheet 8-6. Sustomer Power/SIgnal IRB 2400, 4400, 6400S/PE

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-6.

3HAC 16640-1

216

Sheet 8-7. Customer Cable Power/Signal/CAN IRB 6400R

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-7.

3HAC 16640-1

217

Sheet 8-8. External Control Panel

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-8.

3HAC 16640-1

218

Sheet 8-9. Extension Cable Teach Pendant

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-9.

3HAC 16640-1

219

Sheet 8-10. Time Relay

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-10.

3HAC 16640-1

220

Sheet 8-11. Customer Precess / Power / Signal / Profibus DP M/S

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-11.

3HAC 16640-1

221

Sheet 8-12. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-12.

3HAC 16640-1

222

Sheet 8-13. LAN Ethernet connection

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-13.

3HAC 16640-1

223

Sheet 8-14. Customer power/CAN-BUS IRB 640/6400S

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-14.

3HAC 16640-1

224

Sheet 8-15. Customer cable power/signal CAN-BUS IRB 6600/7600

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-15.

3HAC 16640-1

225

Sheet 8-16. Customer cable power/signal Profibus IRB 6600/7600

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-16.

3HAC 16640-1

226

Sheet 8-17. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-17.

3HAC 16640-1

227

Sheet 9-1. Block Diagram

System 9: External Axis Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-1.

3HAC 16640-1

228

Sheet 9-2. View of External Axis Cabinet

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-2.

3HAC 16640-1

229

Sheet 9-3. Designation

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-3.

3HAC 16640-1

230

Sheet 9-4. Mains Connection

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-4.

3HAC 16640-1

231

Sheet 9-5. Transformer Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-5.

3HAC 16640-1

232

Sheet 9-6. Power Supply, I/O Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-6.

3HAC 16640-1

233

Sheet 9-7. Power Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-7.

3HAC 16640-1

234

Sheet 9-8. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-8.

3HAC 16640-1

235

Sheet 9-9. Drive Unit Signal Connection 1 External Drive Unit

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-9.

3HAC 16640-1

236

Sheet 9-10. Drive Unit Signal Connection 2 External Drive Units

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-10.

3HAC 16640-1

237

Sheet 9-11. Drive Unit Signal Connection 3 External Drive Units

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-11.

3HAC 16640-1

238

Sheet 9-12. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-12.

3HAC 16640-1

239

Sheet 9-13. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT+CCB

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-13.

3HAC 16640-1

240

Sheet 9-14. Drive Unit and Control Cable

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-14.

3HAC 16640-1

241

Sheet 9-15. Service Equipment Supply

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-15.

3HAC 16640-1

242

Index

3HAC 16640-1

243

Index

244

3HAC 16640-1

Maintenance Manual
Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept
3HAC 16639-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept



ABB Automation Technology Products AB


Robotics
S-721 68 VSTERS
SWEDEN
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000
Telefax:
+46 (0) 21 132592

Maintenance Manual, IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16639-1
-

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and


should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages
arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without
ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to
a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention
will be prosecuted.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then
current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved.


ABB Automation Technology Products AB
Robotics
SE-721 68 Vsters
Sweden

Table of Contents

Overview
Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept
Chapter 1: Safety, service
Introduction
Safety, service - General
Section A: References

Limitation of Liability
Applicable Safety Standards
Related information
Section B: Safety risks

Safety risks related to end effector


Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

Safety fence dimensions


Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulator's arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit
Work inside the manipulators working range
Chapter 2: Reference Information
Introduction
Screw joints
Weight specifications
Chapter 3: Maintenance activities, manipulator
Introduction
Section A: Maintenance intervals

Specification of maintenance intervals


Maintenance schedule, IRB 940 Tricept
Section B: Daily maintenance

Daily maintenance, complete robot

3HAC 16639-1

1
3
5
5
6
7

7
7
8
9

9
9
9
10
10
11
13

13
13
14
14
15
15
15
17
17
18
20
21
21
22

22
23
24

24

Table of Contents

Section C: Lubrication activities

25

Lubrication, linear bearings


Lubrication, actuators

25
27

Section D: Replacement activities

Replacement of filter element, OP-unit


Adjusting the overpressure unit
Chapter 4: Maintenance activities, controller
Introduction
Section A: Maintenance intervals

Specification of maintenance intervals


Maintenance schedule, controller S4CPlus
Section B: Inspection activities

Inspection of controller cabinet, S4Cplus


Section C: Replacement activities

Replacement of air filter, controller


Replacement of battery unit, controller
Replacement of system fan unit
Section D: Cleaning activities

Cleaning of controller cabinet


Cleaning of air filter
Chapter 5: Disposal
Disposal

ii

29

29
31
33
33
34

34
35
36

36
37

37
40
44
47

47
49
51
51

3HAC 16639-1

Overview

About This
Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for maintenance of


the complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during maintenance work.

Who Should Read


This Manual?

This manual is intended for:

Prerequisites

Organization of
Chapters

maintenance personnel in the user's organization.

maintenance personnel in other organizations.

The reader should...

be a trained maintenance craftsman

have the required knowledge of mechanical maintenance work OR

have the required knowledge of electrical maintenance work.

The information product is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter

3HAC 16639-1

Contents

1.

Safety, service

2.

Reference information

3.

Maintenance activities, manipulator

4.

Maintenance activities, controller

5.

Disposal

References
Reference

Document Id

Circuit diagram, Manipulator

3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual part 2

Circuit diagram, Controller

3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual part 2

Revisions

Revision

Description

First edition

3HAC 16639-1

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists


of several manuals listed below:

Overview,
Installation and
Commissioning
Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:

Overview, Repair
Manual

Overview,
Maintenance
Manual

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Unpacking

On-site Installation

Electrical connections

Start-up

Robot controller

Installation of controller software

System directory structure

Calibration

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare


parts

Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered


spare parts

Circuit Diagram for manipulator

Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:

Safety, Service

Reference Information

Maintenance schedules

Maintenance activities

Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter "Safety, service" is divided into the following sections:


A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability
applicable safety standards
referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system.
The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector
Safety risks related to tools/workpieces
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Safety risks during installation and service
Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid


dangers.
Safety fence dimensions
Fire extinguishing
Emergency release of the manipulators arm
Brake testing
Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"
Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device
Work inside the manipulators working range

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and
responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete
system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety
of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed
and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards
and regulations of the country where the robot is installed.
The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable
safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the
safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have
been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be
familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the
applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of
external safety
devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external
safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This
means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral
equipment as well as from the robot.
In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service
References

Section A: References
Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be
construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause
injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

3HAC 16639-1

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:

EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology

EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop

EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment

EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces

EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles

EN 775, Robot safety

EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines

EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment


(EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure)
(EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains)

EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments


(EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test)
(EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test)
(EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields)
(EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
immunity test)

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents

Type of information

Detailed in document

Installation of safety devices

Installation and Commissioning Manual

Changing robot modes

Users Guide

Section

Start-up

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks


Safety risks related to end effector
Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure
that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating.
It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the


event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Residual energy

Safe design

3HAC 16639-1

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken.

The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before


starting to repair them.

Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop.

Dump valves should be used in case of emergency.

Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

Qualified
personnel

Extraordinary
risks

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different
industrial applications.

All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the
applicable safety regulations.

Care must be taken at all times.

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are
familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated
with its different parts.

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other
than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be
rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation


and service

Nation/region
specific regulations

10

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning


must always be followed.

Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so


that the robot can be stopped quickly.

Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are
available for the installation in question.

Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot
system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the
robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage
related risks

To be observed
by the supplier of
the complete system

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up


in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are
suitable devices.

Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the
robot's working space.

The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released
or when the motors or other components are removed.

When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling


objects.

Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller.

Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or
other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because
of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the
robot.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function.

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in
the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related
risks, general

3HAC 16639-1

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while


the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the
mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads
and disconnecting or connecting units.

The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can
be turned off outside the robots working space.

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related
risks, controller,
S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:

Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller.

Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power
from an external source.

The mains supply/mains switch

The power unit

The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC)

The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!)

The drive unit (700 VDC)

The service outlets (115/230 VAC)

The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the
machining process

The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even
when the robot is disconnected from the mains.

Additional connections

Voltage related
risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:

Voltage related
risks, tools, material handling
devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in
the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working
process may be damaged.

12

The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC)

The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC)

The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V
AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions


Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the
fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:

- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy
associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and
ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any
projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made from
suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces
involved and appropriate materials.

- insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically


the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process
down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values.
Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation.

- isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray
mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes
involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot
(manipulator or controller)!

3HAC 16639-1

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the
brakes" in the Installation Manual.
The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been
released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not
increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may
be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed
below:
1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of
the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load).
2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating
mode selector on the controller.
3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then
the brake function is adequate.

14

3HAC 16639-1

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach
Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit
(TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When
the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the
MOTORS OFF state.
To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented:
The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way.
During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as
there is no need for the robot to move.
The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when
entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control
over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points
must be observed:
The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position
to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link
or remote control panel.
The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector
is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the
working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.
Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices
mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

3HAC 16639-1

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

16

3HAC 16639-1

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

3HAC 16639-1

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic
materials and does not apply to soft or brittle materials.
Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure
description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are
only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

Screws with
slotted or cross
recess head

Screws with
hexagon socket
head

18

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the
tables below:

Dimension

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"

M2.5

0.25

M3

0.5

M4

1.2

M5

2.5

M6

5.0

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M5

M6

10

17

M8

24

28

40

M10

47

55

70

M12

82

95

120

3HAC 16639-1

Reference Information

3HAC 16639-1

Dimension

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 8.8 "dry"

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 10.9

Tightening
torque (Nm)
Class 12.9

M16

200

235

300

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are
sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in
this way.
ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using
lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

20

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator

Chapter 3:Maintenance activities, manipulator


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all maintenance activities recommended for the manipulator.
This chapter is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific maintenance
activity. Each unit contains all the information required to perform the activity,
e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials.

3HAC 16639-1

21

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Maintenance intervals

Section A: Maintenance intervals


Specification of maintenance intervals

Description

22

The intervals may be specified in different ways depending on the type of maintenance activity to be carried out and the working conditions of the robot.

Calendar time: specified in months regardless of whether the robot system


is run or not.

Operating time: specified in operating hours. More frequent running of the


robot means more frequent maintenance activities.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Maintenance intervals

Maintenance schedule, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The robot, consisting of manipulator and controller cabinet, must be maintained


regularly to ensure its function. The maintenance activities and their respective
intervals are specified in the table below.
Non-predictable situations also give rise to inspections of the robot. If damage is
discovered, attend to it immediately!

Activities and
intervals

The section referred to in the table can be found in the different chapters for every
maintenance activity.
The table below specifies the required maintenance activities and intervals:

Maintenance
activity

Equipment

Interval

Detailed in section

Daily maintenance

Complete robot

Daily

"Daily maintenance"
1

Lubrication

Linear bearings

1000h

"Lubrication, linear bearings"

Lubrication

Actuator

1000h 1

Changing

Filter, overpressure unit

Replacement of filter element, OP-unit

Changing

Battery, distribution box

Removal/Refitting of battery, distribution box in


the Repair Manual.

"Lubrication, actuators"

1)

The interval is based on utilization under normal operating conditions. Operation under severe conditions such as increased ambient temperature or the presence of abrasive or grease absorbent dust will require a more regular maintenance
cycle.

3HAC 16639-1

23

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Daily maintenance

Section B: Daily maintenance


Daily maintenance, complete robot

General

Daily
maintenance

24

The IRB 940 Tricept requires regular maintenance. It is therefore important to


adhere to the following maintenance chart as well as applying the preventive
maintenance schedules set out in any auxiliary equipment chapters. When maintaining the robot it is important to:

Clean the robot and its surrounding environment daily.

Not to use compressed air in sections of the machinery which may suffer
from chips or dust being blown into sensitive areas.

Only use soft cloths when cleaning so as not to cause abrasions on the
machine surfaces.

Not to use any solvents that may have an abrasive or corrosive effect on
the machine surfaces.

The daily maintenance of the robot and its surrounding environment includes:

Removing all chips and/or dust that result from the machining process.

Performing checks on all safety related equipment such as safety switches


and barriers.

Checking for signs of damage or wear on all cables, hoses and other components that can lead to a safety risk or interrupted production in case of
failure.

Checking levels of all lubrication and cooling fluids on both the manipulator
and auxiliary equipment.

Checking that all media supplies, such as compressed air and water, maintain the correct pressures and flows.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Section C: Lubrication activities


Lubrication, linear bearings

Location

The figure below shows the location of the grease lubrication nipple on the linear
guide bearing. The other linear bearing is located on the other side of the center
tube.

xx0200000293

Grease lubrication nipple (one on either side of the center tube)

Required equipment
Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.
Lubricant

3HAC 16639-1

Note

Klber Isoflex NBU 15 2 x 4 ml per linear bearing.

25

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication

The procedure below details how to lubricate the linear bearings.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before lubrication, always clean lubrication interfaces to prevent contamination
entering the lubrication system.
- After lubrication, always clean any spillage around lubrication interfaces.

Step

26

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Clean the rails from old grease and dust.

2.

Apply 4 ml lubricant through the nipple at the Shown in figure above!


bottom end of the linear guide bearing.
Lubricant specified
Both sides must be lubricated!
above!
Note! The ends of the linear bearing are
made from plastic and can crack if not sufficient care is taken when lubricating the bearings.

3.

Run the robot back and forth in the Z-direction several times.

4.

Apply a further 4 ml lubricant through the


same nipples at both side of the center tube.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication, actuators

Location

The three actuators require lubrication with grease. There are four separate grease
nipples for the lubrication on each actuator. The grease nipple that faces up is used
so that as the grease is applied it falls onto the lead screw inside the actuator housing.
The figure below shows the location of the grease lubrication nipples on the actuator.

xx0200000294

Grease lubrication nipples on the actuator

Required equipment

3HAC 16639-1

Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Lubricant

2 x 4 ml per actuator.
For lubrication of the
actuators.

Klberplex BEM
34-132

27

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication

The procedure below details how to lubricate the actuators.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator:
- Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may
result from touching them!
- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the
robot!
- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which
could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual
procedures.
- Before lubrication, always clean lubrication interfaces to prevent contamination
entering the lubrication system.
- After lubrication, always clean any spillage around lubrication interfaces.

Step

28

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Extend the actuators to their maximum allowable length.


If a fixture or other work area restrictions
affect the positioning of the robot, run it so
that one of the actuators is extended, lubricate it and move on to the other two in turn.

2.

Apply 4 ml of lubricant to each actuator


through the topmost grease nipple.
Note! Ensure that the grease nipple that
faces upwards is used, as any other orientated grease nipple will not ensure that the
grease is applied to the lead screw correctly.

3.

Run the actuators through their whole stroke


several times.
Note! The actuators must be extended prior
to lubrication in order to get the correct application onto the actuator screw. Lubricating a
contracted actuator will not apply any grease
on the screw threads.

4.

Apply a further 4 ml through the same grease


nipple.

Lubricant specified
above!
Shown in the figure
above!

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Section D: Replacement activities


Replacement of filter element, OP-unit

Location

The filter element is located in the overpressure (OP) unit as shown in the figure
below.

xx0200000420

Removal of the filter element

Required equipment

3HAC 16639-1

Equipment, etc.

Spare part no.

Filter

3HAC 17158-1

Art. no.

Note

29

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Replacement of
filter

The procedure below details how to replace the filter element in the overpressure
unit.

Step

30

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Exhaust the system and the unit.

2.

Unscrew the filter bowl in an anti-clockwise


direction.

3.

Grasp a new filter element only at the lower


end.

4.

Refit the parts in the reverse order from dismantling.

5.

Recommission the overpressure unit.

Detailed in the section


"Adjusting the overpressure unit".

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Adjusting the overpressure unit

Location

The overpressure unit is installed as shown in figure below.

C
xx0200000421

3HAC 16639-1

Regulator

Pressure guard

Pressure indicator light

Air input

31

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Adjusting

The procedure below details how to adjust the overpressure unit after installation
or after replacement of the filter element.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Slowly pressurize the complete system.

2.

Pull the pressure setting button upwards (away


from the housing).

3.

Turn the pressure setting until the desired pressure (1 bar) is shown on the manometer. The input
pressure must be at least 1 bar greater than the
output pressure.

4.

Press the pressure setting button downwards


(towards the housing) to secure it against unintentional turning.

The output pressure must under no circumstances exceed 1 bar!

32

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller

Chapter 4:Maintenance activities, controller


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all maintenance activities recommended for the control cabinet.
This chapter is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific maintenance
activity. Each unit contains all the information required to perform the activity,
e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials.

3HAC 16639-1

33

Maintenance activities, controller


Maintenance intervals

Section A: Maintenance intervals


Specification of maintenance intervals

Description

34

The intervals may be specified in different ways depending on the type of maintenance activity to be carried out and the working conditions of the robot.

Calendar time: specified in months regardless of whether the robot system


is run or not.

Operating time: specified in operating hours. More frequent running of the


robot means more frequent maintenance activities.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Maintenance intervals

Maintenance schedule, controller S4CPlus

General

The robot controller must be maintained at regular intervals to ensure its function.
The maintenance activities and their respective intervals are specified in the table
below:

Intervals
Maintenance
activity

Equipment

Interval

Detailed in section

Inspection

Controller cabinet

6 mths

"Inspection, controller
cabinet"

Cleaning

Controller cabinet

"Cleaning, controller
cabinet"

Cleaning

Air filter

"Cleaning, air filter"

Replacement

Air filter

4 000 h/
24 mths 1

"Replacement, air filter"

Replacement

Battery unit

12 000 h/
36 mths 1

"Replacement, battery
unit"

Replacement

System fan unit

60 mths

"Replacement, system
fan unit".

1)

3HAC 16639-1

Hours denotes operational time whereas months denotes actual calender time.

35

Maintenance activities, controller


Inspection activities

Section B: Inspection activities


Inspection of controller cabinet, S4Cplus

Inspection

The procedure below details how to inspect the controller cabinet.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

36

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Inspect the cabinet interior to make sure


Replace any faulty seals
there is no contamination.
as required.
If any contamination is found, the cabinet
interior must be cleaned and all gaskets and
seals to the cabinet inspected.

2.

Inspect all sealing joints and cable glands to


make sure they are airtight in order to prevent
dust and dirt from being sucked into the cabinet.

3.

Inspect connectors and cabling to make sure


they are securely fastened and cabling not
damaged.

4.

Inspect any air filters to make sure they are


clean.

Clean any contaminated


filters as detailed in
"Cleaning, air filter".

5.

Inspect any fans to make sure they function


correctly.

Replace any malfunctioning fans as detailed


in their sections respectively.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Section C: Replacement activities


Replacement of air filter, controller

Location of air filter

The air filter is located in the air filter magazine in the front hatch.

A
xx0200000284

Air filter magazine

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Air filter

3HAB 8028-1

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

3HAC 16639-1

Note
These procedures
include references to
the tools required.

37

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Removal, air filter

The procedure below details how to remove the air filter.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Open the bottom of the air filter


magazine as shown in the figure.

xx0200000001

2.

Unlock the lower springs. Lower


the magazine and remove.

3.

Remove the old filter by releasing


the lock shackle and lifting it.
Note! In cases of less contamination, the air filter may be cleaned
and refitted. The procedure for
this is detailed in section "Cleaning the air filter, controller" in the
Maintenance Manual.

xx0200000003

38

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Refitting, air filter

The procedure below details how to refit the air filter.

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the air filter in the Art. no. is specified above!


magazine.

2.

Fit the spring at the


top of the air filter
magazine into the
cabinet door and
push upwards
inwards.
Push until the lower
springs snap into the
cabinet door.

xx0200000006

3HAC 16639-1

39

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Replacement of battery unit, controller

Location of battery unit

The battery unit is located at the bottom of the controller.

A
xx0200000103

40

Battery unit

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art no.

Note

Battery unit

3HAC 5393-2

To be replaced as a
complete unit

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal, battery
unit

These procedures
include references to
the tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

3HAC 16639-1

41

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the battery unit by


unscrewing its attachment
screws (1).
X1

X1

X1

X2

X2

X2

X1

X2

X3

xx0200000004

2.

Pull the battery unit out (2).

3.

Disconnect the three cables


from the battery unit (3).

xx0200000005

42

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Refitting, battery
unit

The procedure below details how to refit the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

3HAC 16639-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Place the battery unit close to its position.

Art. no. specified above!


See illustration above!

2.

Reconnect the cables (3) and push the unit


into position.

See illustration above!

3.

Secure it with the attachment screws (1).

See illustration above!

43

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Replacement of system fan unit

Location of system fan unit

The system fan unit is located as shown in the figure below.

A
D

A
B

xx0200000007

44

Drive units

Bleeder resistor unit

System fan unit

Rectifier (drive unit)

Power supply unit

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

System fan unit

3HAC 12924-2

Note

Other tools and procedures may be required.


See references to
these procedures in the
step-by-step instructions below.

Removal

These procedures
include references to
the tools required.

The procedure below details how to remove the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Remove the bleeder


resistor unit.

Detailed in "Replacement of bleeder resistor"


in the Repair Manual.

2.

Disconnect the cable


(see position 1 in the
figure).
1

xx0200000008

3HAC 16639-1

45

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Step
3.

Refitting

Action

Note/Illustration

Pull the back of the


system fan unit
upwards to free it and
then tip it out of the
enclosure (see position
2 in the figure).

The procedure below details how to refit the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

46

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Fit the system fan unit into position and


Art. no. specified above!
secure it (see position 2 in the figure above).

2.

Reconnect the cable disconnected during


disassembly (see position 1 in the figure
above).

3.

Refit the bleeder resistor unit.

Detailed in section
"Replacement of
bleeder resistor" in the
Repairs Manual.

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Section D: Cleaning activities


Cleaning of controller cabinet

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Vacuum cleaner
Cleaning agent, exterior cleaning

Cleaning of
functional
components

Use rag with e.g. alcohol, if necessary

The procedure below details how to clean the functional components of the controller cabinet.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet!
Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!
Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD
wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD
protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step

3HAC 16639-1

Action

Note/Illustration

1.

Clean the cabinet interior with a vacuum


cleaner if necessary.

2.

If the cabinet is equipped with heat exchangers, it is of the utmost importance that these
are cleaned.
Heat exchangers are normally found:
on the rear of power supplies

on the rear of computer modules

on drive units

If required, remove any


heat exchangers before
cleaning as detailed in
the "Repair Manual".

47

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Dos and donts!

Always!

Never!

48

The section below specifies special considerations when cleaning the controller
cabinet.

Always use cleaning equipment as specified above! Any other cleaning


equipment may shorten the life of paintwork, rust inhibitors, signs, or
labels!

Always check that all protective covers are fitted to the controller before
cleaning!

Never remove any covers or other protective before cleaning the controller!

Never use any cleaning agents, e.g. compressed air or solvents, other
than those specified above!

Never spray with a high pressure cleaner!

3HAC 16639-1

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Cleaning of air filter

Location of air filter

The air filter is located as shown in the figure below:


B

xx0200000002

Air filter

I/O and gateway units

Power supply unit

Drive system

Computer system

Required equipment
Equipment, etc.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Cleaning agent

Note
Water 30-40C with
washing-up liquid or
detergent

Compressed air

3HAC 16639-1

49

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Cleaning

The procedure below details how to clean the air filter.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work:
Turn off all electric power supplies to the robot!
Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse as
parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing gearbox, axis 2.

Step

Action

1.

Clean with the rough surface (on the clean-air


side) turned inwards.

2.

Clean the filter three or four times.

3.

Allow the filter to dry in one of these ways:


Lying flat on a flat surface

50

Note/Illustration

Do not wring the filter out!

Blow dry with compressed air from


the clean-air side.

3HAC 16639-1

Disposal

Chapter 5:Disposal
Disposal

General

All used grease/oils and dead batteries must be disposed of in accordance with the
current legislation of the country in which the robot and the control unit have been
installed.
If the robot or the control unit is partially or completely disposed of, the various
parts must be grouped together according to their nature (e.g. all iron together and
all plastic together), and disposed of accordingly. These parts must also be disposed of in accordance with the current legislation of the country in which the
robot and control unit have been installed.

3HAC 16639-1

51

Disposal

52

3HAC 16639-1

Index

3HAC 16639-1

53

Index

54

3HAC 16639-1

You might also like